Akai | MPC Touch | User guide | Akai MPC Touch Multi-Touch Music Production Center User Guide

Akai MPC Touch Multi-Touch Music Production Center User Guide
User Guide
English
Manual Version 2.2
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................ 7
Tutorial ................................................................... 12
System Requirements & Product Support ...... 7
Creating a Drum Kit ......................................... 12
About This User Guide ...................................... 8
Creating a Drum Sequence ............................. 13
Important Notes ................................................. 8
Renaming & Saving .......................................... 14
Setup ................................................................... 9
Editing Note Events .......................................... 16
1. Connection .................................................. 9
Making Basic Sound Edits............................... 18
2. Installation ................................................... 9
Creating a Bass Track ..................................... 19
3. Getting Started .......................................... 10
Recording an Audio Track ............................... 22
Creating a Song ................................................ 23
Basic Concepts .................................................... 11
Exporting the Song........................................... 24
Other Features Explained ................................ 25
Step Sequencer ............................................. 25
Drum Loops & Chop Mode ............................ 26
Pad Muting & Track Muting ........................... 29
Sampling (Recording) ..................................... 30
Sample Editing ............................................... 31
Recording Automation with Q-Link Knobs .... 33
Using MPC as a Plugin .................................. 33
2
Operation .............................................................. 34
Editors ............................................................ 66
Grid Editor ......................................................... 67
General Features ............................................. 34
MIDI ............................................................ 67
Audio .......................................................... 70
Programs ....................................................... 34
About Programs ................................................. 34
Wave Editor ....................................................... 74
List Editor........................................................... 77
Drum Programs ................................................. 35
Keygroup Programs ........................................... 36
Track View ...................................................... 80
Plugin Programs................................................. 38
MIDI Programs ................................................... 39
Mixer Window ................................................ 83
Clip Programs .................................................... 40
CV Programs ..................................................... 41
Panels ............................................................. 84
MIDI Keyboard ................................................... 84
Toolbar........................................................... 42
Q-Links .............................................................. 85
Menu ................................................................. 42
Q-Link Setup ............................................... 86
File .............................................................. 42
Project ........................................................ 86
Edit ............................................................. 43
Program ..................................................... 87
Tools .......................................................... 46
Pad Scene .................................................. 87
View............................................................ 47
Pad Parameters .......................................... 87
Help ............................................................ 48
Screen ........................................................ 87
Mode Icons ........................................................ 49
Pads .................................................................. 88
Timing Controls .................................................. 49
Program Editor ................................................... 88
Transport Controls ............................................. 50
Parameters ........................................................ 89
Status ................................................................ 51
Project ............................................................... 89
Sampler & Looper .............................................. 90
Inspector........................................................ 52
Pad Banks & Mute ............................................. 90
Sequence .......................................................... 52
Sequence List .................................................... 91
Track ................................................................. 52
Performance Controls ........................................ 91
Program ............................................................. 53
Song Parameters ............................................... 91
Channel Strips ................................................... 54
Pad & Keygroup Channel Strips .................. 54
Preferences .................................................... 92
Program Channel Strip ................................ 55
Audio ................................................................. 92
MIDI Track Channel Strip ............................ 56
MIDI ................................................................... 92
Audio Track Channel Strip........................... 57
Plugins ............................................................... 92
Master & Submix Channel Strips ................. 58
Sequencer ......................................................... 92
Sync .................................................................. 93
Browser ......................................................... 59
Hardware ........................................................... 94
File Browser ....................................................... 60
Project Defaults .................................................. 94
Expansion Browser ............................................ 61
Project Load/Save.............................................. 95
Media Browser ................................................... 62
Drag & Drop ....................................................... 95
Project Info Browser ........................................... 63
General .............................................................. 95
Project Notes Browser ....................................... 64
Undo History Browser ........................................ 64
MIDI Learn Browser ........................................... 65
3
Time Correct .................................................. 97
Modes .............................................................. 123
Metronome .................................................... 98
Main Mode ................................................... 124
Pads ................................................................ 125
Editing Processes .......................................... 99
Audio Region ..................................................... 99
Track View Mode ......................................... 126
Sequence ........................................................ 100
Track ............................................................... 104
Program Edit Mode ...................................... 127
Program ........................................................... 105
Pads ................................................................ 128
Program Editor ................................................. 129
Effects .......................................................... 107
Drum Programs ........................................ 129
Overview .......................................................... 107
Keygroup Programs .................................. 132
Insert Effects .................................................... 109
Plugin Programs ....................................... 135
Send/Return Effects ......................................... 110
MIDI Programs .......................................... 135
Clip Programs ........................................... 136
Automation .................................................. 111
CV Programs ............................................ 137
Global .............................................................. 111
Anatomy of an Envelope .................................. 138
Programs & Audio Tracks................................. 111
Recording Automation ..................................... 112
Sample Edit Mode........................................ 139
Editing Automation ........................................... 113
Trim Mode ....................................................... 141
Q-Links ..................................................... 141
16 Level ....................................................... 115
Pads ......................................................... 142
Parameters ............................................... 143
Note Mapping .............................................. 115
Assigning Samples .................................... 145
Processing Slices & Samples .................... 146
Pad Color..................................................... 116
Chop Mode...................................................... 149
Q-Links ..................................................... 150
Audio Mixdown ............................................ 117
Audio Length ................................................... 117
Render Source ................................................. 117
Render Options ................................................ 117
File Formats ..................................................... 117
Pads ......................................................... 150
Parameters ............................................... 151
Converting or Assigning Slices .................. 153
Processing Slices ...................................... 156
Program Mode ................................................. 158
Q-Links ..................................................... 158
Pads ......................................................... 159
Plugins ......................................................... 118
Scanning Plugins ............................................. 118
Plugin Manager ................................................ 119
Parameters ............................................... 159
Assigning Samples .................................... 161
Processing Slices ...................................... 162
Selecting Plugins .............................................. 120
Expansions .................................................. 121
Expansion Manager ......................................... 121
Selecting Expansions ....................................... 122
Exporting Expansions ....................................... 122
4
Modes (continued)
Pad Mute Mode ........................................... 189
Pad Banks ....................................................... 190
Pad Mixer .................................................... 164
Pads ................................................................ 190
Pad Channel Strip ............................................ 166
Mute ................................................................ 190
Keygroup Channel Strip ................................... 166
Program Channel Strip ..................................... 167
Track Mute Mode ......................................... 191
Audio Track Channel Strip ................................ 168
Pad Banks ....................................................... 192
Pads ................................................................ 192
Channel Mixer.............................................. 169
Mute ................................................................ 193
MIDI Track Channel Strip.................................. 171
Audio Track Channel Strip ................................ 171
Next Sequence Mode .................................. 194
Program Channel Strip ..................................... 172
Sequence List .................................................. 195
Submix Channel Strip....................................... 172
Pads ................................................................ 196
Return Channel Strip ........................................ 173
Performance Controls ...................................... 196
Master Channel Strip........................................ 173
Song Mode ................................................... 197
Step Sequencer ........................................... 174
Sequence List .................................................. 199
Q-Links ............................................................ 175
Pads ................................................................ 199
Pads ................................................................ 175
Song Parameters ............................................. 200
Sampler ....................................................... 176
MIDI Control Mode ....................................... 201
Q-Links ............................................................ 177
Pads ................................................................ 202
Pads ................................................................ 178
Buttons ............................................................ 203
Sampler ........................................................... 179
Q-Link Knobs ................................................... 203
Recording Methods.......................................... 180
XY Pad............................................................. 204
Sample ..................................................... 180
Slice.......................................................... 181
Pad Tap .................................................... 182
Pad Hold .................................................. 182
Looper ......................................................... 183
Q-Links ............................................................ 185
Looper ............................................................. 186
5
Appendix ............................................................. 205
Effects & Parameters .................................... 205
Reverbs........................................................ 205
Delays .......................................................... 207
Flangers ....................................................... 210
Choruses ..................................................... 210
Autopans ..................................................... 211
Tremolos ...................................................... 211
Phasers ........................................................ 212
HP (High-Pass) Filters ................................. 212
LP (Low-Pass) Filters ................................... 213
Parametric EQs ........................................... 214
Distortions ................................................... 215
Compressors ............................................... 216
Bit Reducers ................................................ 217
Other ............................................................ 218
Glossary .......................................................... 219
Trademarks & Licenses ................................ 224
Addenda .............................................................. 225
Updates in MPC 2.1 ....................................... 225
New Features .............................................. 225
Exporting Expansions ....................................... 225
Snap: Absolute & Relative ................................ 226
Pitch Quantization ............................................ 226
Step Sequencer: Velocity Adjustment via
Q-Links ......................................................... 227
Faster Attack for Amp Envelopes ..................... 227
Multiple Plugin Windows................................... 227
Support for Akai Professional MPD2 & MPK2
Series ............................................................ 227
Updates in MPC 2.2 ....................................... 228
New Features .............................................. 228
MIDI Learn ....................................................... 228
Humanize......................................................... 232
Generate Random Events ................................ 233
Multiple Plugin Windows Enable/Disable........... 234
Corrections .................................................. 235
6
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing your MPC. At Akai Professional, we know how serious music is to you. That’s why we
design our equipment with only one thing in mind—to make your performance the best it can be.
This user guide explains how to create music within the MPC software application. There is similar documentation
available for MPC products that use a touchscreen and for those that use an LCD. To view these user guides, click
the Help menu, select MPC Help, and select an option.
Welcome to the MPC family.
Akai Professional
System Requirements & Product Support
For the latest information about this product (system requirements, compatibility information, etc.) and product
registration, visit akaipro.com.
For additional support, visit akaipro.com/support.
7
About This User Guide
This manual describes features in the MPC 2.1 software application. For consistency, the terminology throughout is
based on the MPC parameter names. We also used specific formatting to indicate particular topics of significance:
Important/Note/Tip: Important or helpful information on a given topic.
Names of buttons, controls, parameters, settings, and other options are written in bold characters throughout the manual.
Examples: Click the Play Start button.
Turn Q-Link Knob 4.
Click the Mute button.
The Velocity ranges from 0 to 127.
Set the Sample Play selector to One Shot.
Click BPM, and then use the numeric keypad to enter 120 as the tempo.
Some parts of this manual refer to other relevant chapters or sections, which are cited in bold, italic blue characters.
Examples: Read the Important Notes section before proceeding.
For more information about installing the drivers and software, please see the Setup > 2. Installation.
To learn more about using effects, see Operation > General Features > Effects.
Important Notes
Before installing the MPC software, make sure your computer meets the system requirements described at
akaipro.com. This applies whether you’ll use MPC software as your host software or as a plugin in another digital
audio workstation (DAW).
Before connecting your MPC hardware to your computer, make sure you have installed the latest drivers and
software. Visit akaipro.com to download the latest versions. Refer to Setup > 2. Installation for more information.
8
Setup
1. Connection
Here is just an example of how to use MPC hardware in your setup (MPC Live, in this case). Items not listed in your
included quickstart guide are sold separately.
SD Card
Powered Monitors
USB
drive
Turntable
Computer
Power (optional)
2. Installation
1. Go to akaipro.com and register your product. If you don’t have an Akai Professional account yet, you will be
prompted to create one.
2. In your Akai Professional account, download the MPC software package.
3. Open the file and double-click the installer application.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
Note: By default, the MPC software will be installed in [your hard drive]\Program Files\Akai Pro\MPC (Windows®)
or Applications (macOS®). You can also create a shortcut on your Desktop.
9
3. Getting Started
1. Power on your MPC hardware.
2. On your computer, open the MPC software.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to authorize your version of MPC.
4. You will need an iLok account to complete this. You can create an account at ilok.com.
Make a note of the PACE code in your account, and enter it when asked for it during the authorization/unlock
process.
5. MPC X & MPC Live users: Check the upper-right corner of the window:
•
If you see a monitor/cable icon, then your MPC hardware is already in Controller Mode.
Continue to Step 6.
•
If you see a chip icon, then your MPC hardware is in Standalone Mode. Follow these steps:
i.
Press Menu to enter the Menu.
ii.
Tap the MPC chip icon in the upper-right corner.
iii.
In the Enter Controller Mode window that appears, tap Controller Mode. Looking
for computer may appear briefly in the window before your MPC hardware
recognizes the USB connection as a controller.
6. In the MPC software, open the Preferences:
Windows: Click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click Preferences.
macOS: Click the MPC menu, and click Preferences.
7. In the Preferences window, click the Audio tab and select the sound card you want to use. Click OK when you
are done.
Important: We highly recommend using your MPC hardware’s sound card (Akai Pro [your MPC model] ASIO).
Windows users only: If you need to use your computer’s internal sound card, we recommend downloading the
latest ASIO4ALL driver at asio4all.com.
10
Basic Concepts
This chapter should help explain some fundamental aspects of the MPC software.
The MPC workflow is quite different from traditional digital audio workstations (DAWs). In most typical DAWs, each
track uses an instance of each instrument, and all tracks are always playing even if they don’t contain any audio or
MIDI information. Furthermore, your entire project needs to be arranged just as the resulting song would be.
This isn’t the case with the MPC software, which offers much more flexibility within your project. It’s important to
understand some basic terms, though:
A sequence is a “building block” of a song. It contains multiple tracks that play at the same time like a normal
DAW. In a project, you might create one sequence for your verse and another sequence for your chorus, alternating
and/or repeating each one in a specific order to create the song. (A project can contain 128 sequences.)
A track is a layer in a sequence. There are two types of tracks:
MIDI tracks consist of MIDI data only, no audio data. These tracks produce sound by using programs,
described below. Unlike a normal DAW, each MIDI track exists only in its sequence. The advantage of this is
not having to manage empty or unwanted tracks across all of your sequences—each sequence contains only
the tracks you want to use in it. If you want to use the same track across multiple sequences, you can copy
the track from one sequence into another. (A sequence can contain 128 MIDI tracks.)
Audio tracks consist of a recorded audio signal, like a traditional DAW. These tracks do not use programs
because the audio is already contained in the track. Also, unlike MIDI tracks, audio tracks are present in every
sequence in the project, even if the tracks themselves are empty. (A sequence can contain 128 audio tracks.)
A program is a preset through which MIDI tracks are routed. Programs may contain audio samples that are
triggered when tracks play through them, producing the sound you want on that track. Programs are
independent of tracks and sequences, so you can set multiple tracks to use the same program (unlike normal
DAWs where each track requires its own set of samples or plugin). Furthermore, you can use the same
program/programs across multiple sequences. (A project can contain 128 programs.)
Each program can be played using the 16 pads (across eight pad banks, which gives you access to 128 pads in
each program). Each pad plays a MIDI note when you press it, but that MIDI note will trigger something different
for each program. For instance, in drum programs, the pads are assigned to samples—one pad could trigger a
kick drum sound and another could trigger a snare drum sound—whereas in plugin programs, each pad triggers
a MIDI note that plays the corresponding pitch of its assigned instrument plugin.
Here’s a diagram to illustrate an example of how these pieces could work together:
Sequence
Drum Program
(Drums)
Track (MIDI: Drums)
Keygroup Program
Track (MIDI: Bass)
(Bass)
Track (MIDI: Keys 1)
Keygroup Program
(Keys)
Track (MIDI: Keys 2)
Plugin Program
Track (MIDI: Synth)
(Hybrid 3)
Track (Audio: Vocals)
Mixing
Track (Audio: Vocals)
Track (Audio: Guitar)
Please take a look at the following Tutorial chapter, as well. It will walk you through the creation of a short song to
show you some of the MPC software’s most important features.
11
Tutorial
This chapter is a walkthrough of the creation of a song in the MPC software. To get the most out of this chapter, we
recommend reproducing each of the described steps. The previous Basic Concepts chapter may also help you
understand what we’re asking you to do in this tutorial.
On the following pages we will create a short song to show you some of the MPC software’s most important features.
Make sure you have completed all of the steps described in Introduction > Setup. This includes:
•
Installing the most current drivers and software.
•
Connecting your MPC hardware to a power outlet using the included power adapter and powering it on.
•
Opening and authorizing your MPC software.
Creating a Drum Kit
Let’s start by making a simple drum kit.
By default, the Browser is shown on the right side of the window.
To show or hide the Browser, do one of the following:
•
In the lower-right corner of the window, click the six-rectangles icon, list
icon, or hard-drive icon.
•
In the upper-left corner of the window, click the menu icon (≡), and go to
View > Browser and click: Hidden (to hide the Browser), File Browser (to
show files in the Browser), Expansion Browser (to show your Expansions
in the Browser), or Media Browser (to show your media in the Browser).
Use the Browser controls to navigate to where your drum sounds are located:
•
To browse your files by location, select the File Browser.
•
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow () next to the file path.
•
To select a file or folder, click it once.
•
To enter a folder, double-click it.
•
To load a sample directly to a pad, click and drag the sample onto a pad
in the lower half of the window.
•
To load a selected file to the project’s sample pool, double-click it. If the
file is a sample, it will be loaded to the project’s sample pool. If the file is a
project, it will be loaded in its entirety (you will be asked if you want to close
your current project).
•
To load all files in a selected folder, click and drag the folder onto
anywhere in the window outside of the Browser.
•
To preview a selected sound, click and hold Play () in the lower-left
corner of the Browser.
•
To enable or disable the audition function and set its volume level, click
the volume icon in the lower-left corner of the Browser. Click and drag the
level slider left or right to set the volume level.
If you loaded samples into the sample pool rather than directly to the pads, then let’s start assigning them now:
To load a sample directly to a pad, click and drag it from Project panel (in the Samples column) in the lower half of
the window onto a pad.
To create a simple drum kit, repeat the above steps for other pads. We recommend loading a kick/bass drum,
snare drum, a closed hi-hat, and an open hi-hat.
12
Creating a Drum Sequence
Now that your drum kit is set up, let’s record a drum sequence using your MPC hardware.
1. In the MPC software, click the house icon in the upper-left corner to make sure you’re in Main Mode.
2. On your MPC hardware, press Tap Tempo repeatedly at the speed you want to record your sequence. The
software will detect the rate and adjust itself automatically.
3. Press the Rec () button to activate Record Mode.
4. Press the Play () button to start the actual recording. The pre-count will count one measure before the
sequence starts to record. We recommend recording only one sound (pad) at a time, especially if you are not
familiar with playing drums on the pads.
5. Play a simple kick/bass drum pattern. The note events you just recorded will automatically be placed in the grid
(in this case, on 16th notes). The initial measure length is two bars. After the two bars, the recording will enter
Overdub Mode automatically; the sequence plays again from the beginning and keeps looping, allowing you to
record further notes. Don’t stop the recording!
6. Play the snare drum part, then a hi-hat part.
7. When you’re done recording, press Stop (). The Grid Editor in the software will show what you recorded.
If you start recording again on this sequence, keep in mind that the pads you play in your new recording will
automatically replace existing notes. To prevent this, you can start again from Step 1 but press Overdub (⊕) instead
of Rec (). Overdub lets you record additional note events over the existing sequence.
The Undo button functions differently while in Record Mode. Normally, pressing Undo will undo just the last event.
When there is an event to undo, the Undo button will be lit solid. While recording, the Undo button will flash. In this
case, pressing Undo will erase all events from that recording (i.e., since Play () or Play Start (|) was clicked).
13
Renaming & Saving
We recommend renaming your programs and samples before going further.
The collection of drum samples you loaded earlier (and their respective pad assignments) are arranged into a
program. When you load this program in the future, you will be able to use all of the samples that belong to it.
Let’s rename the exisiting program as we’ll want to create more programs later on.
To rename a program or track, do one of the following:
•
In the “Inspector” on the left edge of the window, double-click the program
name or the track name (in the Program or Track field), type a name, and
press Enter.
•
In the Project panel, under the Programs list, right-click the program, and
click Rename. Type a name. Click OK or press Enter to confirm the name, or
click Cancel or press Esc to keep the original name.
To rename your samples:
1. In the Project panel, do one of the following:
•
Click All Samples.
•
Click a program in the Programs list.
•
Click a sequence in the Sequence list or a program under one of those sequences.
2. In the Samples list on the right side of the Project panel, right-click the sample, and click Rename.
3. Type a name (e.g., Kick, Snare, etc.). Click OK or press Enter to confirm the name, or click Cancel or press Esc
to keep the original name and press Enter.
Repeat the above steps to rename other samples.
14
Now would also be a good time to save your project.
To save your project, click the menu icon (≡), click File, and click Save Project.
In the Save Project window, do any of the following:
To select the storage device you want to view, click the down arrow () next to the file path. If you have
storage devices connected to your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as well.
To enter a folder, double-click it or press Enter.
To create a new folder, click New Folder, type a name for the new folder, and then click OK or press Enter to
confirm the name, or click Cancel or press Esc to keep the original name. You will immediately enter the new
folder.
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow ().
To name the file, click the File field at the bottom of the window, and type a name.
To save the file, click Save or press Enter.
To save the file as a project template file, click the Save as Template checkbox to select it before clicking
Save. This project will then load when you create a new project from a template. (To do this, click the menu
icon (≡) in the upper-left corner of the window, select File, and then click New From Template.)
To cancel, click Cancel or press Esc.
15
Editing Note Events
In the grid, you can see your recorded notes (or note events) as a sequence.
To enter the Grid Editor, click Grid under the mode icons in the upper-left corner of the window.
In the Grid Editor, you can do any one of the following:
•
To zoom in or out, use the sliders in the lower-right corner of the Grid Editor (along each axis), or click the
blue timeline and drag down or up.
•
To undo your last action, do one of the following:
•
o
Click the undo/back-arrow icon in the upper-right corner of the Grid Editor.
o
Click the menu icon (≡), click Edit, and click Undo.
To redo the last action you undid do any one of the following:
o
Click the redo/forward-arrow icon in the upper-right corner of the Grid Editor.
o
Click the menu icon (≡), click Edit, and click Redo.
•
To enter a note, click the pencil icon above the grid. Then, in the grid, click an empty square. Alternatively,
double-click an empty grid square when using the marquee tool.
•
To delete a note, click the eraser icon above the grid. Then, in the grid, click a note. Alternatively, doubleclick a note when using the marquee tool.
•
To select a single note, click the pencil icon or marquee icon above the grid. Then, in the grid, click a note.
To select all notes for a pad, click the desired pad in the Pads area below the grid, or on the left edge of
the Grid Editor.
•
To move the selected notes, click the pencil icon or marquee icon above the Grid Editor. Then, in the grid,
click and drag the note to the desired location. By default, you can position notes only by quantization values
defined by the Time Correct value (learn about this feature in Operation > General Features > Time Correct).
To move the selected notes without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid, click and
drag the note while holding Shift.
16
•
To adjust the start point or end point of the selected notes (without
changing their position), click the pencil icon or marquee icon above the
Grid Editor. Then, in the grid, hover the cursor over the left or right edge of
the note. When the cursor changes into a bracket with arrows ([ or
]), click and drag the edge of the note to the desired length.
•
To transpose the selected notes up or down, click and drag the notes
up or down.
•
To switch to another track, do one of the following:
o
In the Inspector, click the Track field, and click the desired track in
the menu that appears.
o
Click the menu icon (≡), go to Edit > Track, and click Next Track
or Previous Track.
o
Click and drag the Current Track Q-Link knob (in the Q-Links
panel below the Grid Editor) up or down.
•
To mute or solo the track, click the three-bars icon in the lower-left
corner of the window to show the track channel strip (on the left), and then
click M or S (respectively) on the track channel strip.
•
To open the Time Correct window, click the menu icon (≡), go to Edit >
Time Correct, and click Settings.
This feature is described in Operation > General Features > Time Correct.
Tips:
To adjust the time division only, click the TC field at the top of the window,
and click one.
To adjust the amount swing only, click and drag the Swing field at the
top of the window up or down (or click it, type a value, and press Enter).
•
To adjust the metronome settings, go to Tools > Metronome. This feature
is described in Operation > General Features > Metronome.
Tips:
To activate or deactivate the metronome, click the metronome icon at
the top of the window.
To adjust the metronome volume only, click and drag the Metro meter at
the top of the window up or down.
•
To adjust the velocity of the selected notes (manually), click Velocity in
the automation lane below the grid to select it, and then click and drag the
handle/handles below the note/notes. Each note’s velocity is represented
by a vertical bar. The higher and more red the bar is, the higher the velocity
is. The current velocity value will appear next to the cursor.
•
To show or hide the velocity lane, click the up or down arrow (∧ or ∨)
button next to the horizontal scroll bar under the grid.
17
Making Basic Sound Edits
Let’s make sure the samples are properly tuned and have good levels.
Click the four-pads icon in the toolbar to enter Program Edit Mode.
Click a pad to show its parameters in the window.
To adjust its volume, click and drag the Level knob in the Pad section up or down.
To adjust its stereo panning, click and drag the Pan knob in the Pad section up or down.
Adjust the level of each pad to suit your taste. We recommend spreading the panning of the bright sounds (e.g.,
cymbals, snare drum) a little. Additionally, you can tune the bass drum sound—in the Sample Layers section, adjust
the Semi and Fine knobs next to the sample name.
The snare drum may need some reverb to give it a more spatial sound.
Click the pad icon in the lower-left corner of the window to show the pad channel strip
in the Inspector above it. Press the pad with your snare drum sound to select it.
To add an effect:
1. In the Inspector, click the arrow () in the desired effect slot. A list of effects will
appear.
2. Click the + or – icon to expand or collapse each category of effect.
3. To load an effect, double-click it. Alternatively, click it to select it and then click
Select. Let’s try Reverb Medium.
To adjust the effect’s parameters, double-click the effect name in the slot.
To empty the effect slot, load an effect but select <none> instead. Switch the effect
on or off by clicking the On/Off button for the slot.
18
Creating a Bass Track
Let’s try recording a bass line. Unlike a drum kit, it’s important to be able to play and record a bass sound
chromatically, so this will be slightly different than setting up the drum kit.
Adding a bass line over the drum part means we need to work on a new track. A track is simply a layer of a sequence.
Each track uses a program within your project. You can work with multiple tracks in a single sequence (e.g., a drum
track, a bass track, a piano track, etc.). When you play the sequence, all of them will play simultaneously.
Let’s select an empty track, create a program to go with that track, and load a bass sample into that program.
To select a new track, click the Track field in the Inspector, and click Track 2 (unused) in the list of tracks that appears.
Rename the track so we know what it is (e.g., Bass Line).
To create a new program:
1. In the Inspector, click the piano-keys icon under the Track field. This icon indicates a
keygroup program, which is necessary to play the bass sound chromatically with the
pads. A name for the new keygroup program will appear in the Program field below.
2. Double-click the new program name, type a name, and press Enter.
To load and edit a bass sound:
1. Use the File Browser on the right edge of the window to navigate to where your bass sounds are located, and
load one to the project’s sample pool.
2. After loading a bass sample to the sample pool, don’t click and drag the sample onto a pad like you did when
creating a drum program; keygroup programs are different.
Instead, make sure you are in Program Edit Mode: click the four-pads icon in the toolbar.
3. In Program Edit Mode, click the first menu (Layer 1) in the Sample Layers section, and then click your bass
sample in the list that appears. Because you’re working with a keygroup program instead of a drum program,
this sample is now playable across all pads.
Tip: If you click Pad Bank D in the Pads panel and and click Pad 13, you should hear the bass sample played
back with its original pitch. You can use the other pads to play your sample chromatically.
19
Let’s add a second layer and set the layers’ velocity ranges so the bass will sound different when played at a higher
velocity (as a real bass would):
1. Use the File Browser to select a different bass sample that sounds similar but a little bit brighter, and load it to
the project’s sample pool.
2. Return to Program Edit Mode, click the Layer 2 menu in the Sample Layers section, and then select the new
bass sample. Click a pad to hear both samples will sound at once. Maybe this new sound is interesting as it is,
but let’s make some quick edits to get as close as we can to a real-life bass sound.
3. Click and drag the right edge of the Velocity slider for Layer 1 to 80.
4. Click and drag the left edge of the Velocity slider for Layer 2 to 81.
Now when you press a pad, the lower velocities (0–80) will trigger the Layer 1 sample only, while higher velocities
(81–127) will trigger the Layer 2 sample only.
Let’s record that bass line now. Prepare your recording as described earlier, and record some bass notes. You can
edit your recording just like we’ve done earlier.
20
Once you’ve recorded it, let’s tweak the sound a bit in the Filter section:
1. In Program Edit Mode, click the Type menu in the Filter section, and select a
filter. Let’s try working with Lowpass 4 Pole.
2. Click and drag the Cutoff or Res (resonance) knobs to adjust their settings
until your bass sample sounds good to you.
3. Under the Amp Envelope section, click and drag the Attack or Release knobs
up or down to adjust their settings. These control the overall level characteristics
of the sound.
Let’s add an effect or two to this keygrouup program—do this in the same way as
you did for a drum program.
So far, we’ve created a simple drum sequence and a bass line to go with it.
21
Recording an Audio Track
We’ve already created some MIDI tracks, so let’s record some actual audio for our next track:
1. Click the house icon in the toolbar to enter Main Mode.
2. Click the Audio tab at the top of the Inspector. Audio 001 will appear in the Track field.
3. Connect a synthesizer or other line-level audio source to the 1/4” (6.35 mm) input/inputs
on your MPC hardware, and set its Line/Phono selector to Line.
Alternatively, connect it to your external audio interface.
4. In the audio track channel strip:
i.
Click the input menu (Input __) above, and select Mono > Input 1 or Stereo >
Input 1,2 (depending on your audio source) as the input source.
ii.
If the output menu (Out __) is not set to Out 1,2, click it and select Output >
Out 1,2 as the output.
iii.
Click the Monitor (speaker) button to cycle through its three states until it reads
Auto (you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only).
5. On your MPC hardware or external audio interface, turn the Rec Vol knob to set the
input level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in the meter.
Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter should not be “peaking”
constantly).
6. In the audio track channel strip, click the Record Arm () button next to the pan knob
to record-enable the track.
7. In the toolbar at the top of the window, click Rec () or Overdub (⊕) to record-arm it.
Alternatively, click Rec or Overdub on your MPC hardware.
8. To start recording, click the Play () or Play Start (|) button in the toolbar (or press
Play or Play Start on your MPC hardware)—then play your audio source! You should
hear your existing sequence playing in the background.
To stop recording, click the Stop () button in the toolbar (or press Stop on your
MPC hardware).
Before creating a song, it would be good to have at least two different sequences, so record
another audio track:
1. In the Inspector, click the Sequence field, and click Sequence 2 (unused) in the list of
sequences that appears.
2. Click the + icon next to the Track field to add another audio track (Audio 002) to go
with that sequence.
22
Creating a Song
This section explains how to make a song out of your sequences. Before starting, make sure that you have recorded
some sequences.
To enter Song Mode, make sure playback is stopped, click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the
toolbar, and click Song.
In Song Mode, each of the sequences you’ve created in this project assigned to a pad in the Pads panel. The
Sequence List panel is to the left of the pads, showing the song’s structure. The upper half of the window will show
“blocks” representing each sequence of the song’s structure.
As a song plays, it moves through each step shown in the Sequence List panel. Each step contains a sequence you
assign in its Sequence menu. Each step can be repeated, determined by the value in the Rpts column (a value of 1
means the sequence will play through only once). The Bars column on the right indicates the length of that sequence.
Each step can be set to play its sequence at an independent tempo, determined by the value in the BPM column.
Important: Each sequence has its own tempo, while the project itself may use a different master tempo. The BPM
value for each sequence may be different from the master tempo. As long as playback is set to follow the master
tempo, each sequence’s individual tempo will be ignored. By default, each project is set to use the sequence tempo,
which you set back in the Creating a Drum Sequence chapter. We recommend clicking the Seq/Mst button at the top
of the window (so the button displays Mst) and entering a master tempo to ensure all sequences use the same tempo.
To insert a step at the current position, click Insert Step in the Song Parameters panel. Alternatively, click and
drag the pad that corresponds to that sequence into the editor above it.
To delete the currently selected step, click Delete Step in the Song Parameters panel.
To set which sequence plays for a step, click the step’s Sequence menu in the Sequence List panel, and then
click the sequence in the menu that appears.
To set how many times a sequence repeats, click and drag the step’s Rpts field (next to the sequence name) up
or down.
23
Exporting the Song
Want to share your new song? Just export it first.
To export a song:
1. Click the menu icon (≡), and go to File > Export and click As
Audio Mixdown.
2. In the Audio Mixdown screen that appears, do the following:
•
Make sure the Start bar field is set to 1, and set the End
bar field to the last bar of your song.
•
Click and drag the Audio tail field to set it to 2 seconds.
•
As you’ll likely share the song online, click the mp3 file
format option under File format.
3. Click Export and choose where you want to save the song.
To name the song, click the File field, type a name, and then click
Save or press Enter to start exporting.
24
Other Features Explained
This chapter describes various advanced features. For fuller explanations of these features, please refer to their
corresponding sections in the Operation chapter.
Step Sequencer
You’ve already learned how to record note events on a track, but you can quickly enter note events in the Step Sequencer
by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
To enter the Step Sequencer, do one of the following:
•
Click the step-bars icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the down arrow (), and click Step Sequencer.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Step Sequencer.
Let’s create a sequence on a new track:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the Track field, and then
select an (unused) track.
2. If the left-most four-pads icon in the Track section is not selected, click it. This
indicates that the track is using a drum program.
3. Click the list icon in the Track section in the Inspector, and click Length so it
is selected.
4. Click and drag the Length field in the Track section up or down to set a length
for the track. If you select the minimum value, Sequence, the track will be
however long your sequence is.
Tip: This lets you maintain tracks of different lengths. For instance, you could play a 1-bar drum sequence
repeatedly under a 4-bar bass line.
5. Click the Bar  /  buttons at the top of the Pads panel to select the bar whose steps you want to create or
edit. The bar number will appear in the field.
6. Click the pad or sample name in the grid to select the pad whose steps want to create or edit. Alternatively, click and
drag the Pad field in the Pads panel up or down; or click Pad Select, click a pad, and then click Pad Select again.
7. Click Play () to start your sequence.
8. Each pad represents a step in the bar. If the pad already has note events on the selected track, the corresponding
pads (steps) will be lit with colors corresponding to their velocities.
To enter a note at a step, click an unlit pad. The pad will light up with a color corresponding to its velocity.
To delete the note from a step, click a lit pad. The pad will become unlit.
See Operation > Modes > Step Sequencer to learn more about this feature.
25
Drum Loops & Chop Mode
Modern music producers often use drum loops to add grit and nuance to programmed beats. This section explains
how to use Sample Edit Mode to work with drum loops.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, do one of the following:
•
Click the waveform-and-flags icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the down arrow (), and click
Sample Edit.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Sample Edit.
1. Use the Browser to locate a drum loop, and then double-click it to add it to the project’s sample pool. The loop
does not have to match the tempo of anything in the project.
2. In the Project panel, click the drum loop you just loaded in the Samples column. If you do not see it, click All
Samples in the Project column.
3. In the Q-Links panel, click Chop to enter Chop Mode, which will let us cut the drum loop into slices.
4. Click the Chop To menu, and then click Threshold.
5. Below that, click the Threshold field and drag it up or down to set a value. The lower the threshold, the more
slices will be created. Be sure to select a value so that every transient peak of the drum loop has a corresponding
a slice marker.
Tip: Each slice will be automatically assigned to a pad: Pad A01 plays Slice 1, Pad A02 plays Slice 2, etc. Press
each pad to play the slice with the same number.
26
Let’s use this chopped sample to create a new program in which each of these slices is an individual sample. We
can also automatically create corresponding note events to play back these slices sequentially.
1. In the Extract New Samples section, click New Program.
2. Make sure the Convert To menu is set to New Program with New
Samples is selected. If it is not, click it, and select that option.
3. Make sure Crop Samples is selected. If it is not, click it.
4. Make sure Create New Program is selected. If it is not, click it.
5. Make sure Create Events is selected. If it is not, click it.
6. Click and drag the Bars field up or down to select how many bars the entire
sample should use in your program.
7. Click Do It to proceed. Each slice will be assigned to a pad, and each pad
will have a recorded note event in the track. When you play that track, it will
play each pad (each slice) in the original order. Enter Main Mode to see
how the sample appears in your sequence.
8. Click Play and listen to how the drum loop matches your sequence’s tempo.
27
You can also edit the note events of the drum loop slices—stay in
Main Mode to do this. A new track with the note events playing
their corresponding slices has been automatically created.
Use the Time Correct window to quantize the note events so they
fall on exact, even time intervals.
To show the Time Correct window, click the menu icon (≡), and
go to Edit > Time Correct and click Settings.
You can also rearrange the note events, thus creating a new
playback order for the slices. You can also edit each slice or
sample in Program Edit Mode. You can add effects for slices or
use the filter function to change the frequency range of a selected
slice. There are limitless possibilities!
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode to
learn more about this feature.
28
Pad Muting & Track Muting
Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode let you silence different pads and tracks to see what the sequence sounds
like without those samples or parts.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, do one of the following:
•
Click the X-in-square icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the down arrow (), and click Pad Mute.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Pad Mute.
1. Press Play to play the sequence.
2. In the Inspector on the left edge of the
window, click the Track field, and select a
track that uses a drum program.
3. Mute a pad by clicking it. The muted pad will
be lit red. You can mute multiple pads at the
same time.
See Operation > Modes > Pad Mute Mode to learn
more about pad mutes.
You can also mute entire tracks by using the similar Track Mute Mode.
To enter Track Mute Mode, do one of the following:
•
Click the bars-and-X icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the  icon, and click Track Mute.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Track Mute.
1. Press Play to play the sequence.
2. In the Inspector on the left edge of the
window, click the Sequence field, and select
the desired sequence.
3. Each pad is assigned to a track. Mute a track
by clicking it. The pad will be lit red. You can
mute multiple tracks at the same time.
Tip: To mute a track only at precise note intervals
(“quantizing” your mutes, essentially), click the Time
Correct menu, and click the desired musical value
(e.g., 1 bar). Now, when you click a pad in Track
Mute Mode, the mute will occur precisely at the
beginning of the following time division (in this
example, one bar). This lets you test musical
combinations of patterns—the preliminary stage to
building a song structure.
See Operation > Modes > Track Mute Mode to
learn more about track mutes.
29
Sampling (Recording)
This section describes recording new samples of your own, which you can use in your projects.
Important: To record any audio, you need to connect an audio source to your MPC hardware or to your computer’s
audio interface.
To enter the Sampler, do one of the following:
•
Click the vinyl-and-tonearm icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the down arrow (), and click Sampler.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Sampler.
1. Connect an audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware or
computer’s audio interface.
2. In the channel strip in the Sampler panel, click the input menu (Input
__), and select the input channels for your audio source.
3. On your MPC hardware or computer’s audio interface, set the input
level while playing your audio source. You should now see the level in
the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter
should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. Click and drag threshold slider to set the threshold. Set it to a fairly
low level (e.g., -50 dB).
5. Click Arm to record-arm the Sampler.
6. Play your audio source. The Sampler will start recording immediately
when the input level reaches the threshold value. Alternatively, click the
round Record button or press Enter to manually start recording.
7. To stop recording, click the round Stop button or press Enter. The
Keep or Discard Sample window will appear.
In the Keep or Discard Sample window:
To name the new sample, click the New Name field, type a name,
and press Enter.
To assign the new sample to a program, click the Program menu
and select the desired program.
To assign the sample to a pad in the program, click and drag the
Assign to Pad field up or down, or press the desired pad on your MPC
hardware.
To confirm your selections, click Keep.
To discard the recording and close the window, click Discard.
To play the recording, click Play.
See Operation > Modes > Sampler to learn more about this feature.
30
Sample Editing
You may need to edit your newly recorded samples using Sample Edit Mode.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, do one of the following:
•
Click the waveform-and-flags icon in the toolbar. If it is not shown, click the down arrow (), and click
Sample Edit.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Mode, and click Sample Edit.
In Sample Edit Mode:
To switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode, click the Trim, Chop, or Program tab in the Q-Links panel.
In this example, use Trim Mode.
To set the sample’s start point, click and drag the green start point marker left or right. You can also use the
Q-Link knobs to adjust the start point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, click the value in the
Start field in the Parameters panel (in the lower half of the window), type a new value, and press Enter.
To set the sample’s end point, click and drag the red end point marker left or right. You can also use the QLink knobs to adjust the start point with varying degrees of resolution. Alternatively, click the value in the End
field in the Parameters panel (in the lower half of the window), type a new value, and press Enter.
To hear your edits, click Pad 10 while in Trim Mode to play the sample from the start point to the end point.
31
Let’s apply some processing to the sample.
To show or hide the Parameters panel, click Parameters below
the sample waveform.
1. In the Parameters panel, click Pitch Shift to change the
overall pitch of your sample. This will transpose the sample
without affecting its length.
2. To set the pitch shift amount, click and drag the Pitch field up
or down. Alternatively, click the Pitch field, type a value, and
press Enter. To close the window, click Cancel or press Esc.
3. To confirm your selections, click Do It.
To cancel the process, click Cancel or press Esc.
See Operation > Modes > Sample Edit Mode to learn more.
32
Recording Automation with Q-Link Knobs
Automating various parameters is a good way to add some
motion and dynamism to your sequences.
1. In Main Mode, click a pad that has a sample assigned to
it—ideally one that is played multiple times throughout the
sequence, so you can hear the automated changes
across several notes.
2. In the Q-Links panel, click the Q-Link Mode menu and
select Pad Scene. This enables the Q-Link knobs to
control various automatable parameters for that pad.
3. On the program channel strip, click the automation button
under the Mute (M) button until it shows the red Write (W)
option. This ensures your track will record the automation.
4. Record the automation using your MPC hardware:
i. Press Play to start it.
ii. Turn any of these Q-Link knobs (for example) to
record their movement: Q1 (Level), Q2 (Pan), Q12
(Tuning).
iii. Press Stop to finish the automation recording.
5. On the program channel strip, click the automation
button under the Mute (M) button until it shows the green
Read (R) option. This ensures your track uses the
automation you just recorded when you play it back.
Want to see what you’ve recorded? In the software, to the left of the velocity lane under the grid, click the name of
the parameter you automated (Level, Pan, or Tuning). The automation curve will appear in the lane. If part of the
curve is still not quite what you want, select the pencil tool above the grid and draw in your own automation curve.
See Operation > General Features > Automation to learn more about this.
Using MPC as a Plugin
If you’re working with other audio software, you can use the MPC software as an instrument plugin (VST, AU, or AAX
format) within your host software.
Important: Some of the MPC software’s keyboard shortcuts may not work if you are using the MPC software as a
plugin (due to those shortcuts being used by your host DAW instead). Go to Help > Software Information and
select Keyboard Shortcuts to view a complete list of shortcuts within the MPC software.
Note: To learn how to load and use an instrument plugin in a host application, please refer to the corresponding
chapter of your host application’s manual.
33
Operation
This chapter explains the complete features and functions of the MPC software.
General Features
Programs
About Programs
Each track you create within a sequence uses a program. There are six types of programs, each of which
determines how the track sounds or what it is used for. A single project can hold up to 128 programs.
This chapter covers how to create each program type.
To learn about editing your programs to your preference, see the Modes > Program Edit Mode chapter.
A drum program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Drum programs are
used mostly for creating drum parts and quickly and easily assigning samples to pads. See Drum Programs
for more information.
A keygroup program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Keygroup programs are used to play samples
chromatically with a MIDI keyboard or the MPC pads. See Keygroup Programs for more information.
A plugin program contains an instance of a plugin through which you can send your track’s MIDI data. See
Plugin Programs for more information.
A MIDI program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum
machine. See MIDI Programs for more information.
A clip program uses several samples that can be looped (clips). Each clip can be assigned to a pad, which you
can press to trigger the clip according to a quantization setting. This lets you create intriguing, layered
performances by launching different combinations of clips together. See Clip Programs for more information.
A CV program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device that uses control voltage (CV),
like a synth. Although this option is selectable, it is usable only with MPC hardware that has CV outputs (e.g.,
MPC X). See CV Programs for more information.
34
Drum Programs
A drum program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the settings
for each sample (i.e., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Drum programs are used mostly for
creating drum parts and quickly and easily assigning samples to pads.
To create a drum program:
1. In the Inspector, click the four-squares icon below the Track field, which
indicates a drum program. (Click the i icon to show or hide the Inspector. See
Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a drum program yet, a new drum program (named
Program, appended with a number) will be added automatically to the project and
appear in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a drum program, the first one will be selected
automatically and appear in the Program field below.
To create another drum program, click the + icon above the Program field. A new
drum program will be created and appended with a number (e.g., Program 002).
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and press
Enter.
To load a sample into a drum program:
1. In the File Browser, find a sample you want to use. (Click the hard-drive icon in the
lower-right corner to show or hide the File Browser. See Browser to learn more.)
2. Click and drag the sample from the Browser onto the desired pad. Alternatively,
double-click the sample to load it to the sample pool without loading it to a
specific pad.
To assign samples to additional pads, repeat Steps 1–2.
Tip: Remember that a drum program has 128 pads total—16 pads across eight banks.
Alternatively, assign samples in a drum program this way:
1. Click the four-pads icon in the toolbar to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. In the bottom half of the window, scroll to the right to find the Sample Layers section. This lets you view the
samples assigned to all four layers of the drum program as well as tuning and level parameters for each layer.
3. Click a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if any). The pad will be lit green.
4. Click the menu for a layer, and select a sample.
Tip: Remember that a drum program has 128 pads total—16 pads across eight banks.
35
Keygroup Programs
A keygroup program uses one or more samples as its sound source. It contains (1) a list of samples and (2) the
settings for each sample (i.e., pitch tuning, effects, etc.). Keygroup programs are used to play samples chromatically
with a MIDI keyboard or the MPC pads.
To create a keygroup program:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the piano-keys icon below
the Track field, which indicates a keygroup program. (Click the i icon to show or
hide the Inspector. See Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a keygroup program yet, a new keygroup program
(named Program, appended with a number) will be added automatically to the
project and appear in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a keygroup program, the first one will be selected
automatically and appear in the Program field below.
To create another keygroup program, click the + icon above the Program field.
A new keygroup program will be created and appended with a number (e.g.,
Program 002).
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and press
Enter.
To load a sample for your keygroup program into the project:
1. In the File Browser, find a sample you want to use. (Click the hard-drive icon in the lower-right corner to show
or hide the File Browser. See Browser to learn more.)
2. Click and drag the sample from the Browser onto any space outside of the Browser. Alternatively, double-click
the sample to load it to the sample pool.
To load additional samples, repeat Steps 1–2.
36
To assign samples in a keygroup program:
1. Click the four-pads icon in the toolbar to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. In the bottom half of the window, scroll to the right to find the Sample Layers section. This lets you view the
samples assigned to all four layers of the current keygroup as well as tuning and level parameters for each layer.
3. Click a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if any). The pad will be lit green.
Tip: In the Pads panel, click the Pad Bank D button to and click Pad 13. You should hear the sample played
back with its original pitch. You can use the other pads to play your sample chromatically.
4. Click the menu for a layer, and select a sample.
To create complex keygroup programs, you can add more keygroups (up to 128). This is useful when working with
multi-samples (e.g., when programming a real piano).
Tip: Remember that a keygroup program offers up to 128 keygroups, and each keygroup can hold up to four
samples (Layers 1–4). This is a total of 512 samples.
37
Plugin Programs
A plugin program contains an instance of a plugin through which you can send your track’s MIDI data. This lets you
use the same instance of a plugin with multiple tracks (rather than load an instance of a plugin on every track, which
can be cumbersome and CPU-intensive). See the Plugins chapter to learn about scanning and selecting plugins.
To create a plugin program:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the plug icon below
the Track field, which indicates a plugin program. (Click the i icon to show
or hide the Inspector. See Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a plugin program yet, a new plugin program
(named Plugin, appended with a number) will be added automatically to the
project and appear in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a plugin program, the first one will be
selected automatically and appear in the Program field below.
To create another plugin program, click the + icon above the Program
field. A new plugin program will be created and appended with a number
(e.g., Plugin 002).
3. Click the Plugin menu. In the list that appears, click the desired plugin.
To sort your plugins by type or maker, click Sort by type or Sort by
manufacturer.
4. Click Select to select the plugin, or click Close to cancel.
Note: You have to specify the disk directory where your plugins are located.
This can be done in the software’s Preferences. See Preferences to learn
more.
5. Next to the Program field, click the menu icon (≡) and click All so it is
selected. This will show all three settings.
To select the MIDI channel the program will use, click the Midi Ch
menu, and click the desired channel. Use this setting when you are working
with a virtual instrument plugin that supports multi-mode.
To select a preset in your plugin (if any), click the Preset menu, and click
the desired preset.
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and
press Enter.
To adjust the volume and panning of a track using the plugin program:
1. Click the three-sliders icon in the toolbar to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. In the bottom half of the window, click the channel strip that represents the
track with the plugin program to select it. (If you do not see it, make sure
the MIDI Tracks button between the grid and channel strips is on.)
3. Click and drag the volume slider or pan knob up or down to adjust it.
Important:
If you copy a sequence, the volume and pan values will be copied with that
sequence. This is also true if you move to a new sequence and put the same
plugin program on a new track.
By default, some plugins do not support MIDI volume and pan. In this case,
adjust volume levels and panning on the plugin program channel strip instead of
the track channel strip.
38
MIDI Programs
A MIDI program lets you send your track’s MIDI data to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine.
To create a MIDI program:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the MIDI-jack icon
below the Track field, which indicates a MIDI program. (Click the i icon to
show or hide the Inspector. See Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a MIDI program yet, a new MIDI program
(named Midi, appended with a number) will be added automatically to the
project and appear in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a MIDI program, the first one will be selected
automatically and appear in the Program field below.
To create another MIDI program, click the + icon above the Program
field. A new MIDI program will be created and appended with a number
(e.g., Midi 002).
3. There are five additional settings to configure for a MIDI program: the MIDI
Port, program change message (Prog Ch), MIDI channel (Midi Ch), Most
Significant Byte (Bank), and Least Significant Byte (Bank LSB). See Modes
> Main Mode to learn more.
Next to the Program field, click the menu icon (≡) and click All so it is
selected. This will show all five settings.
To configure each setting, click its menu, and click the desired option.
Note: You also have to configure the MIDI ports in the software’s Preferences.
See Preferences to learn more.
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and
press Enter.
To adjust the volume and panning of a track using the MIDI program:
1. Click the three-sliders icon in the toolbar to enter the Channel Mixer.
2. In the bottom half of the window, click the channel strip that represents the
track with the MIDI program to select it. (If you do not see it, make sure the
MIDI Tracks button between the grid and channel strips is on.)
3. Click and drag the volume slider or pan knob up or down to adjust it.
Important: If you copy a sequence, the volume and pan values will be copied
with that sequence. This is also true if you move to a new sequence and put the
same MIDI program on a new track.
39
Clip Programs
A clip program uses several samples that can be looped (clips). Each clip can be assigned to a pad, which you can
click or press to trigger the clip according to a quantization setting. This lets you create intriguing, layered
performances by launching different combinations of clips together.
By default, the 16 pads are divided into four columns of four pads. Each column represents a mute group; when a
pad is playing a clip, all other pads in that same mute group are turned off. This enables you to launch a clip without
having to manually stop other clips that are similar. For instance, pressing Pad 2 may launch a bass clip. You could
then press Pad 6, which launches another bass clip and stops the clip on Pad 2. This way, you’ll never be playing
two bass clips simultaneously.
The four-columns pad configuration described above is just a default to make things easy (e.g., you could use the
first column for drum clips, the second for bass clips, the third for keyboard clips, and the fourth for vocal clips.). You
can use Program Edit Mode to assign pads to any combination of mute groups you want.
To create a clip program:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the play-button icon below
the Track field, which indicates a clip program. (Click the i icon to show or hide
the Inspector. See Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a clip program yet, a new clip program (named
Clip, appended with a number) will be added automatically to the project and
appear in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a clip program, it will be selected automatically and
appear in the Program field below.
To create another clip program, click the + icon above the Program field. A
new clip program will be created and appended with a number (e.g., Clip 002).
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and press
Enter.
To load a clip into a clip program:
1. Click the house icon in the toolbar to enter Main Mode.
2. In the File Browser, find a loop you want to use. (Click the hard-drive icon in the
lower-right corner to show or hide the File Browser. See Browser to learn more.)
3. Click and drag the loop from the File Browser onto the desired pad. Alternatively,
double-click the loop to load it to the sample pool without loading it to a specific pad.
To assign clips to additional pads, repeat Steps 2–3.
40
Alternatively, assign clips in a clip program this way:
1. Click the four-pads icon in the toolbar to enter Program Edit Mode.
2. In the bottom half of the window, find the Program section. This lets you configure the settings for each pad in
the clip program.
3. Click a pad to select it (and play its assigned samples, if any).
4. Click the Pad menu above the Start and End times, and select a clip.
To assign clips to additional pads, repeat Steps 3–4.
To clear the assigned clip from a selected pad, repeat Step 5 but select None.
CV Programs
A CV program lets you send your control voltage (CV) signals to an external MIDI device like a synth or drum machine
that uses CV.
Important: CV programs are available only while using an MPC model with CV outputs (e.g., MPC X).
To create a CV program:
1. In the Inspector on the left edge of the window, click the CV icon below the
Track field, which indicates a CV program. (Click the i icon to show or hide the
Inspector. See Inspector to learn more.)
2. If the project does not contain a CV program yet, a new CV program (named CV,
appended with a number) will be added automatically to the project and appear
in the Program field below.
If the project already contains a CV program, it will be selected automatically
and appear in the Program field below.
To create another CV program, tap the + icon above the Program field. A new
CV program will be created and appended with a number (e.g., CV 002).
3. There are five additional settings to configure for a CV program: the CV Port,
Gate Port, modulation wheel port (Md.Wheel), velocity port (Vel Port), and note
tracking (Note). See Modes > Main Mode to learn more.
Next to the Program field, click the menu icon (≡) and click All so it is selected.
This will show all five settings.
To configure each setting, click its menu, and click the desired option.
To rename the program, double-click the Program field, type a name, and
press Enter.
41
Toolbar
This chapter describes the available options in the toolbar at the top of the software window.
Not all elements of toolbar are shown by default. For instance, some mode icons and transport controls are hidden.
Furthermore, you can choose to hide parts of the toolbar that are shown.
To select or deselect the items you want to see in the toolbar, click the menu icon (≡) in the upper-left corner
and select View. See View > Toolbar for more information.
Menu
To access the software’s menu, click the menu icon (≡) in the upper-left corner of the
window.
macOS Users: Five items in this section appear differently on macOS than listed below:
Exit/Quit MPC, Preferences, Check for Updates, Expansion Store, and About MPC are
located in the MPC menu next to the apple icon (rather than the menus listed below).
Tip: Several selections in the menu can be made by using computer keyboard shortcuts.
You can see these keyboard shortcuts next to these selections in the menu. Go to Help >
Software Information and select Keyboard Shortcuts to view a complete list of shortcuts
within the MPC software. Some of these shortcuts may not work if you are using the MPC
software as a plugin (due to those shortcuts being used by your host DAW instead).
File
•
New Project creates an empty project. Use this command when you want to start a project from scratch.
•
New From Template loads a user-defined project template. We recommend creating a project with the basic
settings that suit your needs and saving it as a project template for easy access. See Preferences > Project
Load/Save to learn how to set this template.
•
Load Recent provides shortcuts to the last 10 files you have been recently working with. The list is chronological
with the most recent file at the top.
•
Save Project saves the current project. In the window that appears, name your project and select a save location. The
samples in the Project panel will be automatically saved with the project. The project file (.xpj), and its information
(samples, MIDI files, program files, etc.) will be saved in a folder with the same name on the same folder level.
•
Save Project As is identical to the Save Project function but lets you save the current project with a new name.
•
Save All Programs saves all programs of your project.
•
Save Current Program saves only the current program (.xpm).
•
Save Current Sequence saves only the current sequence (.sxq).
•
Save MIDI Control Scene saves your control map as set in MIDI Control Mode (.mcn). See Modes > MIDI
Control Mode chapter for more information about creating a control map.
•
Export lets you export your project or sequence data in various formats: a single project archive file, MPC
formats, a standard MIDI file, or as an audio mixdown file. Select the desired option from the sub-menu.
o
As Project Archive exports the entire project as a project archive file (.xpa). In the window that appears,
type a file name and set the save location. This option is useful when you want to transfer a project
between different computers without dealing with its component files.
o
As Pattern exports the track (for the current sequence only) as a pattern (.mpcpattern).
o
As MPC1000/MPC2500 Sequence exports the current sequence so it can be read by an MPC1000 or
MPC2500 (.seq).
o
As MPC1000/MPC2500 Program exports the current program so it can be read by an MPC1000 or
MPC2500 (.pgm).
42
o
o
o
o
o
•
As MPC5000 Sequence exports the current sequence so it can be read by an MPC5000 (.mid).
As MPC5000 Program exports the current program so it can be read by an MPC5000 (.50s).
As MIDI Sequence File exports the sequence as a standard MIDI file (.mid). In the window that appears,
type a file name and set the save location. This option is useful when you want to import your sequences
into separate sequencer software or exchange them with another artist.
As MIDI Track File exports the track as a standard MIDI file (.mid). In the window that appears, type a
file name and set the save location. This option is useful when you want to import your tracks into
separate software or exchange them with another artist.
As Audio Mixdown exports the sequence or song as an audio file. See the Audio Mixdown chapter for
more information about this process. If you are in Song Mode, it will affect the entire song. If you are in
any other mode, it will affect the current sequence only.
Exit closes the software. (On macOS, this is named Quit MPC and is located in the MPC menu next to the apple
icon.) If you have not saved any changes made to a currently open project, it will prompt you to do so before quitting.
Edit
•
Undo undoes the last action you performed. When there are no actions left to undo, this command will be
unavailable and appear grayed out.
•
Redo undoes the Undo command. You can continue redoing actions until there are no items left to redo, in
which case, the Redo command will be unavailable and appear grayed out.
Important: If you perform a new action when the Redo command is available, you will no longer be able to redo.
In other words, as soon as you perform an editing action other than Undo, Redo is no longer available.
•
Undo History lets you view a list of previously executed commands in the Undo History panel. As you undo and
redo commands, you can see your current “position” in the list of commands in the window.
Tip: To revert to a previous “state” in your project, click and drag the point just after the last step. Any “undone”
steps will be grayed out. You can do the same to redo grayed-out steps, as well.
•
Cut removes selected events from the grid and copies it to the clipboard. After cutting events, you can paste or
insert them at another location in the same or another sequence.
•
Copy copies selected events from the grid to the clipboard without removing them. After copying events, you
can paste or insert them at another location in the same or another sequence.
•
Paste lets you to paste the contents of the clipboard at the position marker’s current location.
•
Select All selects all events or audio track regions in the current sequence and track.
•
Deselect deselects all events or audio track regions in the current sequence and track.
•
Nudge Event Left/Right by TC shifts the selected event/events left or right (respectively) by the time division set
in the Time Correct settings.
•
Nudge Event Left/Right by Tick shifts the selected event/events left or right (respectively) by one tick.
•
Time Correct displays options for using time correct (quantization):
o Apply quantizes the currently selected note events. If no note events are selected, nothing will be quantized.
o Settings opens the Time Correct window where you can configure its settings. See the Time Correct
chapter for more information about this.
•
Humanize applies randomization to the timing, length, and/or velocity of MIDI events. See Addenda > Updates
in MPC 2.2 > New Features > Humanize for more information about this.
•
Pitch Quantize forces the pitches of note events on a MIDI track into a specific scale. See Addenda > Updates
in MPC 2.1 > New Features > Pitch Quantization for more information about this.
•
Audio Region provides options related to editing the current audio track region:
o Duplicate copies and pastes the track region immediately after the original one.
o Mute silences the track region.
o Reverse reverses the track region.
o Warp lengthens or shortens the track region without changing its pitch.
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if
used too freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function.
43
•
Sequence provides options related to editing the current sequence:
o
Clear erases all tracks and their note events from the current sequence. After selecting this, click Clear
to confirm your choice or Cancel to cancel it. This operation cannot be undone.
o
Half Length will immediately halve the length of the sequence (without deleting any note events).
o
Double Length will immediately double the sequence and copy all events from the first half to the
second half.
o
Insert Blank Bars adds empty bars to a sequence at a specified point. See Editing Processes >
Sequence for more information.
o
Delete Bars removes a range of bars from a sequence. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more
information.
o
Copy Bars copies a range of bars from a sequence and adds them to another at a specified point. See
Editing Processes > Sequence for more information.
o
Copy Events copies a range of events from a sequence and add them to another at a specified point.
See Editing Processes > Sequence for more information.
o
Copy Sequence copies the contents of one sequence to another. See Editing Processes > Sequence
for more information.
o
Copy Track copies the contents of one track to another. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more
information.
o
Transpose transposes a range of events on a track in a sequence. See Editing Processes > Sequence
for more information.
o
Erase erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more
information.
o
Events Double Speed immediately halves the lengths of all note events on all tracks in the sequence as
well as the distance between them. In other words, all tracks’ notes are pressed closer together so the
sequence sounds like it is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches
of notes or the tempo.
o
Events Half Speed immediately doubles the lengths of all note events on all tracks in the sequence as
well as the distance between them. In other words, all tracks’ notes are spread further apart so the
sequence sounds like it is playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches
of notes or the tempo.
o
Next Sequence selects the next sequence. If you select this during playback, the next sequence will be
selected when the current one is done playing.
o
Previous Sequence selects the previous sequence. If you select this during playback, the previous
sequence will be selected when the current one is done playing.
o
Next Sequence Now selects the next sequence immediately.
o
Previous Sequence Now selects the previous sequence immediately.
o
Export as MIDI lets you export the current sequence as a standard MIDI (.mid) file. See Editing Processes
> Sequence for more information.
o
Bounce to Sample immediately renders the sequence (all of its tracks) as an audio sample (.wav) and
places it in the project’s sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the
sequence name. If you have already used this function on this sequence, then it will create another audio
sample appended with the next-highest number.
o
Bounce to New Audio Track immediately renders the sequence (all of its tracks) as an audio track (.wav) in
the project. The Audio tab will be automatically selected. By default, the sample will be named Bounce - and
appended with a number. This function does not work for tracks that use MIDI programs or CV programs.
44
•
Track provides options related to editing the current track:
o Select All selects all events or audio track regions in the entire track.
o Deselect deselects all events or audio track regions in the entire track.
o Delete erases the entire audio track. This cannot be used on MIDI tracks.
o Clear erases all note events from the current track.
o Explode immediately splits the current track into multiple tracks—one for each distinct pad or note
(pitch, not event). The current track also remains present and intact, while each track created from it is
labeled with the track name and pad name or number.
o Events Double Speed immediately halves the lengths of all note events on the track as well as the
distance between them. In other words, the track’s notes are pressed closer together so the track sounds
like it is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
o Events Half Speed immediately doubles the lengths of all note events on the track as well as the distance
between them. In other words, the track’s notes are spread further apart so the track sounds like it is
playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
o Next Track selects the next track.
o Previous Track selects the previous track.
o Export as MIDI lets you export the current track as a standard MIDI (.mid) file. See Editing Processes >
Sequence for more information. This cannot be used on audio tracks.
o Bounce to Sample immediately renders the track as an audio sample and places it in the project’s
sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the sequence name. If you have
already used this function on this sequence, then it will create another audio sample appended with the
next-highest number.
o Bounce to New Audio Track immediately renders the track (for the current sequence only) as an audio
track in the project. The Main Mode will automatically switch to the Audio tab, and the original track will
be muted. By default, it will be named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002). This function
does not work for tracks that use MIDI programs or CV programs.This cannot be used on audio tracks.
•
Program provides options related to editing the current program:
o Pad Color opens the Pad Color window where you can assign specific colors to your pads in each
program. See Pad Color for more information.
o Note Mapping opens the Note Mapping window where you can assign a MIDI note to each pad in a
program.
o Flatten Pad renders all samples on a pad as an audio sample and places it on the first layer of that pad.
See Editing Processes > Program for more information.
o Duplicate immediately creates an identical program. The duplicate program will use the same name but
appended with a number (e.g., Program 002).
o Duplicate to New Track immediately creates an identical program on a new track. The duplicate
program will use the same name but appended with a number (e.g., Program 002). The new track will be
named Track and appended with a number (e.g., Track 06).
o Merge lets you copy the pads (and their parameters) from one program into another, essentially
consolidating two programs into one. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more information.
o Delete erases the program from the project. The samples used in that program will remain in the
project’s sample pool and any other programs that use them.
o Rename lets you enter a new name for the program. Type a name and click OK to continue or Cancel to
return to the previous screen.
o Bounce to Sample immediately renders all tracks that use that program (for the current sequence only)
as an audio sample and places it in the project’s sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and
appended with the program name. This function does not work for MIDI programs or CV programs.
o Bounce to New Audio Track immediately renders that program (for the current sequence only) as an
audio track in the project. The Main Mode will automatically switch to the Audio tab. By default, it will be
named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002). This function does not work for MIDI
programs or CV programs.
•
Preferences opens the Preferences window, which contains many customizable elements of the software. (On
macOS, Preferences is located in the MPC menu next to the apple icon.) Click the corresponding tab on the
left to select it (e.g., MIDI, Sequencer, etc.). Click the OK button to close the Preferences window. Preferences
are automatically saved. See the Preferences chapter for more information about this.
45
Tools
•
Metronome
o
Count-In enables or disables the metronome pre-count before recording.
Off disables the metronome pre-count.
Record enables the pre-count during recording only.
Record + Play enables pre-count in both Record and Playback Modes.
o
Enable offers the settings for the metronome.
Off disables the metronome.
Play enables the metronome sound during playback only.
Record enables the metronome sound during recording only.
Record + Play enables the metronome to happen in both Record and Playback Modes.
o
Rate lets you to select the metronome click’s time division: 1/4, 1/4T, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/16, 1/16T, 1/32 or
1/32T (T indicates a triplet-based time division).
o
Sound lets you to select the sound that you want to hear for the metronome: Sidestick 1, Sidestick 2,
Clap, Metroclick, Shake, Tambourine, or MPC Click.
o
Output lets you set where the metronome signal will be heard: a pair of master outputs (Out 1,2–31,32)
or a single master output (Out 1–32).
•
16 Level opens the 16 Levels window. See 16 Level for more information.
•
MIDI Keys enables or disables the use of your computer keyboard to enter or play a range of 17 MIDI notes,
starting from a C. This is the same as using the Keyboard button in the toolbar.
On standard US/American computer keyboard, use the A, S, D, F, G, H, J, K, L, and ; keys to play the white
keyboard keys, and use the W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, and P keys to play the black keyboard keys. Press [ or ] to
shift the range of playable notes up or down (respectively) by one octave.
If the MIDI keyboard is shown, the corresponding computer keyboard character will be shown above each key
(though you can still use MIDI keys even if it is hidden).
Enabling MIDI Keys disables Pad Keys.
Tip: Show the MIDI keyboard to visualize the keys in a traditional piano keyboard. See Panels > MIDI Keyboard
to learn about this.
•
Pad Keys enables or disables use of your computer keyboard to play the 16 pads of
the current pad bank. This is the same as using the Keyboard button in the toolbar.
On a standard US/American computer keyboard, use the keys as follows:
the Z, X, C, and V keys plays Pads 01, 02, 03, and 04
the A, S, D, and F keys plays Pads 05, 06, 07, and 08
the Q, W, E, and R keys plays Pads 09, 10, 11, and 12
the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys plays Pads 13, 14, 15, and 16
Enabling Pad Keys disables MIDI Keys.
•
Delete Unused Samples deletes any samples not assigned to a pad from the project.
Important: The samples will be deleted immediately from the project. The software will not ask for confirmation or
allow you to cancel, but you can undo this action (i.e., with the Undo command or hardware button), if needed.
Tip: You can delete unused samples by clicking the trash can icon in the upper-right corner of the Project
panel, as well.
•
Tidy Keygroup Sample Names automatically renames all samples belonging to a keygroup based on their
keygroup, layer, and other information. This option is available only for keygroup programs.
•
Generate Random Events lets you create random melodic or drum patterns on the current MIDI track. See
Addenda > Updates in MPC 2.2 > New Features > Generate Random Events for more information about this.
46
•
Convert To Progression opens the Convert Track to Progression
window that automatically detects the chords that are played on the
currently selected track, which you can save as a chord progression.
Use the Name field to enter a name for the progression.
The Saved To field indicates where the file is saved. The file will
be saved as a .progression file in the Progressions folder in
[your hard drive]\Program Files\Akai Pro\MPC (Windows) or
[your hard drive]/Users/[your user name]/Library/Akai/MPC/
Progressions (macOS).
Use the Root Note field to set the root note of the progression.
This defines the starting note of the scale of the progression.
The Chords Detected field indicates how many chords were
automatically detected in the track.
Use the Scale Type menu to select the scale or mode of the
progression based on the Root Note.
The panel below lists the chords in the order they are played.
Click the red root note of a chord to play it. Click the text next
to it to rename the chord.
Click and drag the Type field up or down to select whether the chord is played at its root note (Root), in the
octave range as it appears in the track (Normal), above its root note (AboveRoot), or below its root note
(BelowRoot).
The Notes column indicates how many notes were detected in the chord.
Click Do It to convert the track or Cancel to close the window without converting.
•
Rebuild Media Browser Database resets and rescans your Media Browser. See Browsers > Media Browser
to learn more about the Media Browser.
•
Stop All Sounds immediately stops all sounds within the software.
•
Plugin Manager opens the Plugins window which contains a list of all available plugins, based on your selected
plugin folders. This the same as clicking the gear icon in the lower-left corner of the effect selection menu. See
the Plugins chapter to learn about this.
•
Expansion Manager opens the Expansions window which contains a list of your MPC expansions. See the
Expansions chapter to learn about this.
•
LCD Window opens the LCD window, an emulation of the monochromatic display used on the MPC
Renaissance or MPC Studio. Click the down arrow () in the upper-right corner so it becomes an up arrow ()
to keep the window on top at all times. Click it again to allow the window to be hidden under others. Click the X
in the upper-right corner to close the window.
View
•
Mode lets you select from any of the available software modes. See Modes to learn about these.
•
Q-Link Mode lets you select from any of the five edit modes for the Q-Link knobs. See Panels > Q-Links to learn
about these.
•
Toggle Audio/MIDI Mode lets you switch between viewing MIDI tracks and audio tracks. This is the same as
clicking the MIDI or Audio tab at the top of the Inspector.
•
Toolbar lets you select or deselect the items you want to see in the toolbar at the top of the window. This
includes the Mode Icons, the Timing Controls, the Transport Controls, and overall Status indicators.
The Toolbar Modes submenu lets you select or deselect each mode icon. Selected ones will be shown in the
toolbar. You can also select All to show all of them or Default to show the default ones (which we find are the
most often used).
•
Inspector lets you select or deselect the items you want to see in the Inspector on the left edge of the window.
This includes the Inspector itself (Show Inspector), send effect knobs on the channel strips (Sends), and insert
effect slots on the channel strips (Inserts). You can also select which channel strip you want to display: the pad
channel strip (Pad Channel), the program channel strip (Program Channel), or the MIDI track channel strip
(MIDI Channel). See Inspector to learn more about this.
47
•
Browser lets you select or deselect options that determine how the Browser is shown on the right edge of the
window. You can hide or unhide the Browser (Hidden); show the File Browser, Expansion Browser, Media
Browser, Project Information Browser, Project Notes Browser, or Undo History Browser; show the Quick
Help panel; or allow the Media Browser to show all tags. See Browser to learn more about this.
•
Editor lets you select or deselect options that determine how the editor is shown in the top half of the window.
You can switch between the standard half-screen view or a full-screen view; show pad colors in the Grid Editor;
show or hide the automation lane under the Grid Editor; or switch between the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List
Editor (when each option is available, depending on the mode).
•
Show Mixer Window lets you show the mixer window. This is the same as clicking the two-sliders icon in the
lower-left corner of the main software window. See Mixer Window to learn more about this feature.
•
Show MIDI Keyboard shows or hides a piano keyboard at the bottom of the window. You can use these keys to
play or enter notes. See Panels > MIDI Keyboard to learn about this.
•
Zoom In At Playhead and Zoom Out At Playhead zoom into or out of the Grid Editor or Wave Editor
(respectively) while keeping the audio playhead or last-moved marker at the center.
•
Zoom In Vertically and Zoom Out Vertically zoom into or out of the Grid Editor or Wave Editor (respectively).
•
Minimize minimizes the MPC software window.
•
Full Screen expands the MPC software window into a full-screen mode.
Help
•
Search (macOS only) allows you to find results for specific search terms, which you can enter in this field.
•
Quick Help shows or hides the Quick Help panel in the lower-right corner of the window under the Browser.
This is the same as going to View > Browser > Quick Help or clicking the ? icon in the lower-right corner of the
window. This panel is visible only when one of the Browsers is shown.
•
Keyboard Shortcuts opens a window with a list of all available keyboard shortcuts to execute various actions in
the MPC software.
•
MPC Help lets you open the user manual PDFs for the MPC software as well as the different types of MPC
hardware that can control the MPC software.
•
Software Information lets you open various items specific to this MPC software: the release notes PDF for this
version of the MPC software (MPC Release Notes); the user manual PDF for Hybrid 3 (Hybrid Instrument).
Important: Some of the MPC software’s keyboard shortcuts may not work if you are using the MPC software as
a plugin (due to those shortcuts being used by your host DAW instead).
•
Set Up Guides lets you open a PDF with instructions on how to set up MMC control in this software (MMC Control).
•
Check for Updates checks online for any available updates to the MPC software. (On macOS, Check for Updates
is located in the MPC menu next to the apple icon.) You must have an internet connection to use this feature.
•
Expansion Store opens an online store of available MPC Expansions on the Akai Professional website. (On macOS,
Expansion Store is located in the MPC menu next to the apple icon.) You must have an internet connection to use
this feature.
•
About MPC opens a window with information about this MPC software. (On macOS, About MPC is located in
the MPC menu next to the apple icon.)
48
Mode Icons
The mode icons let you select the current software mode.
Main
Program Edit
Track View
Pad Mixer
Sample Edit
Step Sequencer
Channel Mixer
Looper
Sampler
Track Mute
Pad Mute
Song
Next Sequence
MIDI Control
Click a mode icon to enter its corresponding mode.
Click the down arrow () to show a menu of all modes, and click a mode to enter it.
Timing Controls
Click the metronome icon at the top of the window to enable or disable the metronome.
Click and drag the Metro meter at the top of the window to set the volume of your
metronome click.
The Metronome menu contains all settings regarding the metronome (click track).
To view the metronome settings, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and click
Metronome. See Metronome for more information about this.
Click the Sync field to determine whether the MPC software receives MIDI Clock
information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time Code information (MTC), communication from Ableton
Link, or none of these (Off). This is the same setting as the Receive menu in Sync tab of
your Preferences. See Preferences for more information.
Note: Ableton Link is a new technology that synchronises beat, phase and tempo of
Ableton Live and Ableton Link-enabled applications over a wireless or wired network.
Click the TC field to set the quantization value. Note events will “snap” to these time
divisions on the grid. The T indicates a triplet-based value.
Click the Swing field to set the amount of swing from 50% to 75%. Swing lets you “shuffle”
your beats—from subtle to extreme.
The Time Correct window contains all settings to help quantize events in your sequence.
To open the Time Correct settings, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click
Time Correct. See Time Correct for more information about this.
The time counter indicates the current playhead position.
To adjust the position, click and drag each field up or down
To switch the time increments, click the note icon or stopwatch icon.
When set to Beats (note icon), the time is shown in Bars, Beats, and Ticks.
When set to Time (stopwatch icon), the time is shown in hours (HH), minutes (MM),
seconds (SS), and frames (FF).
The MIDI monitor indicates incoming MIDI events.
49
Use the BPM field to adjust the tempo of the sequence. Click and
drag it up or down, or double-click it, type a value, and press Enter.
Alternatively, click Tap at the desired rate; the software will
automatically detect the tempo.
Click the Seq/Mst button to set whether each sequence follows its
own tempo (Seq) or a master tempo (Mst).
Transport Controls
Click Record () to record-arm the sequence. Click Play () or Play
Start (|) to start recording. Recording in this way (as opposed to
using Overdub) erases the events of the current sequence. After the
sequence plays through once while recording, Overdub (⊕) will be
enabled.
Click Overdub (⊕) to enable Overdub. When enabled, you can record
events in a sequence without overwriting any previously recorded
events. You can enable Overdub before or during recording.
After you record-arm the track and start playback, click Record
from Sequence Start to start recording once the sequence loops
back to its start. This is essentially a punch-in feature for the entire
track, enabling you to start playing a record-armed track while
allowing more time than the usual count-in to prepare for the actual
recording to start.
Click Punch In to enable or disable the Punch In feature, which
enables you to record over a specified length of time in the track.
While recording, the entire sequence will play, but you will record
over only the area between the Punch In and Punch Out markers,
indicated by a red line below the blue timeline. Any part of the
sequence before the Punch In marker or after the Punch Out marker
will remain untouched, even if you perform over it during recording.
Click Stop () to stop playback. Alternatively, press the space bar.
You can double-click this button to silence audio that is still
sounding once a note stops playing. Quickly clicking this button
three times will act as a “MIDI panic” and shut off all voices and stop
all audio processing.
Click Play () to play the sequence from the playhead’s current
position.
Click Play Start (|) play the sequence from its start point.
50
Status
The In and Out boxes indicate the MPC software is receiving or sending (respectively) MIDI
messages from or to your MPC hardware.
The CPU meter shows the software’s current usage of your computer’s CPU.
The automation button indicates the global automation state. See Automation to learn
about this.
Use the Auto-Scroll selector to set how the editor behaves relative to the audio playhead.
Follow: Depending on the zoom setting, the editor will scroll along in the background
while keeping the audio playhead centered.
Page: The editor will move to the “next page” to follow the audio playhead.
Off: The editor will not move at all.
Click the Keyboard button to cycle through three options:
Off: Pad Keys and MIDI Keys are off. Your computer keyboard will work normally.
Pad Keys: Pad Keys is on, enabling your computer keyboard to play the 16 pads of the
current pad bank. See Menu > Tools > Pad Keys to learn about this.
MIDI Keys: MIDI Keys is on, enabling your computer keyboard to enter or play a range
of 17 MIDI notes, starting from a C. See Menu > Tools > MIDI Keys to learn about this.
The volume meter shows the software’s master output level. Click and drag the volume slider
to adjust it.
51
Inspector
The “Inspector” is a panel on the left edge of the window shows information about
the current sequence, track, and program as well as two “dynamic” channel strips for
convenient monitoring and mixing.
To show or hide the Inspector, do one of the following:
•
Click the i icon in the lower-left corner of the window.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), go to View > Inspector, and select Show Inspector.
The MIDI and Audio tabs at the top of the Inspector determine whether it will show
information about the project’s MIDI tracks or audio tracks. Click one to select it.
Sequence
Click the > or ∨ next to the Sequence field to collapse or expand this section.
Click the Sequence field or down arrow () to select a sequence.
Double-click the Sequence field to rename the sequence.
Click the small menu icon (≡) to select or deselect which items are shown in this section:
Bars: the number of bars in the sequence
BPM: the sequence tempo (as opposed to the master tempo)
Trans/Transpose: the transposition of the sequence in semitones
Loop: determines whether or not sequence playback will loop
Start: the first bar of the sequence loop
End: the last bar of the sequence loop
Time Sig/Time Signature: the time signature of the sequence
Right-click the Sequence field to show a menu of some editing processes. See
Editing Processes > Sequence for more information.
Track
If the MIDI tab is selected, click the > or ∨ next to the Track field to collapse or
expand this section. If the Audio tab is selected, this section cannot be expanded.
Click the Track field or down arrow () to select a track.
Double-click the Track field to rename the track.
Click the small menu icon (≡) to select or deselect which items are shown in this section:
Type: the type of program the track is using
Length: the length of the track in beats. When set to Seq, the track will use the
length of the sequence.
Velo/Velocity: the velocity of the track
Trans/Transpose: the transposition of the track in semitones
Mute/Solo: Mute or Solo buttons for the track
Right-click the Track field to show a menu of some editing processes. See Editing
Processes > Track for more information.
52
Program
The Program section is shown only when the MIDI tab at the top of the Inspector is
selected.
Click the > or ∨ next to the Program field to collapse or expand this section (when a
plugin program, MIDI program, or CV program is selected).
Click the Program field or down arrow () to select a program.
Double-click the Program field to rename the program.
Click the + next to the Program field to create a new program of the same type.
Click the small menu icon (≡) to select or deselect which items are shown in this
section (when a plugin program, MIDI program, or CV program is selected):
Plugin Program:
Plugin: the plugin that the program is using. See the Plugins chapter to learn
about scanning and selecting plugins. Click the window icon next to the menu
to show the plugin’s graphical user interface in a separate window.
Preset: the preset/patch (if any) within the plugin.
MIDI Ch/MIDI Channel: the MIDI channel the program is using.
MIDI Program:
Port: the port over which the program sends its MIDI data.
MIDI Ch/MIDI Channel: the MIDI channel over which the program sends its
MIDI data.
Prog Ch/Program Change: the program change message the program sends out.
Bank: the Bank message (Most Significant Byte or MSB) that the program
sends out.
LSB: the Least Significant Byte (LSB) message that the program sends out.
CV Program:
CV Port: the CV port the program is using.
Gate Port: the Gate port the program is using.
Md.Wheel/Mod Wheel: the CV port the modulation wheel is using.
Vel Port/Velocity Port: the CV velocity port.
Note/Note Tracking: the CV program’s note track: lowest, highest or last.
Right-click the Program field to show a menu of some editing processes. See Editing
Processes > Track for more information.
53
Channel Strips
The Inspector can display two “dynamic” channel strips, which vary slightly in appearance.
When the MIDI tab at the top of the Inspector is selected, you can select the pad channel strip, program
channel strip, or MIDI/track channel strip.
When the Audio tab at the top of the Inspector is selected, you can show or hide the audio track channel strip only.
Pad & Keygroup Channel Strips
While using a drum program, keygroup program, or clip
program, click the pad icon at the bottom of the
Inspector. The pad or keygroup channel strip will be
shown on the left side, and the corresponding program
channel strip for that pad or keygroup will be shown on
the right side.
The number of the pad or keygroup is at the bottom
of the channel strip.
The first menu shows the current pad or keygroup
number. Press a pad or click the field to select a
different pad or keygroup.
Tip: This is useful for mixing your pads or
keygroups without having to enter the Pad Mixer.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled
effects for that pad or keygroup. See Effects > Insert
Effects to learn more about pad or keygroup insert
effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the
send levels for the pad or keygroup. A return
channel strip will automatically be shown on the
right side. Click anywhere in the lower half of the
pad/keygroup channel strip to show the program
channel strip again. See Effects > Send/Return
Effects to learn more about pad or keygroup
send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the
pad or keygroup is routed, which you can set to the
current program (Program), a submix (Submix >
Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output >
Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono
Output > Out 1–32). Usually, this is set to Program.
Click M or S to mute or solo the pad or keygroup
(respectively).
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the
panning or level (respectively) of the pad or
keygroup. The green level meter next to the slider
shows the pad’s current volume level in dB.
See below for descriptions of the adjacent program
channel strip.
54
Program Channel Strip
While using a drum program, keygroup program, clip program, or plugin program,
click the four-pads icon at the bottom of the Inspector. The program channel strip
will be shown on the left side, and its corresponding master or submix channel strip
will be shown on the right side.
The name of the program is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu shows the current program (which you can change).
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that program. See
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about program insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the program. A
return channel strip will automatically be shown on the right side. Click anywhere
in the lower half of the program channel strip to show the master or submix
channel strip again. See Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about
program send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the program is routed, which you
can set to a submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output >
Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the program (respectively).
Click the program automation button to cycle through the three possible states
of program automation:
When off, the program will ignore automation data. If you have already
recorded or entered automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R)
and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off by pressing and
holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will
still use the effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not
record any additional automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter
automation. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental
changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any
Q-Link knobs assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch
any accidentally while you are recording.)
See Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation
by clicking the global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of
the program. The green level meter next to the slider shows the program’s current
volume level in dB.
See below for descriptions of the adjacent master channel strip.
55
MIDI Track Channel Strip
While using a drum program, keygroup program, plugin program, or clip program,
click the three-bars icon at the bottom of the Inspector. The MIDI track channel
strip will be shown on the left side, and its corresponding program channel strip will
be shown on the right side.
The first menu shows the current track (which you can change) and its name.
The second menu shows the name of the program the track is using (which you
can change).
Click M or S to mute or solo the track (respectively).
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of
the track. The green level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current
velocity level (0–127).
Note: If the track is using a plugin program, then the slider will send CC #7
(Volume) and the knob will send CC #10 (Pan) to your instrument plugin. The
plugin will then handle these messages as it normally would.
See above for descriptions of the adjacent program channel strip.
56
Audio Track Channel Strip
While using an audio track, the audio track channel strip will be shown on the left side,
and its corresponding master or submix channel strip will be shown on the right side.
The name of the track is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu defines the input source of the external audio signal, which you can
set to a pair of inputs (Stereo > Input 1,2–31,32) or a single input (Mono > Input
1–32).
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that track. See Effects
> Insert Effects to learn more about audio track insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the track. A
return channel strip will automatically be shown on the right side. Click anywhere
in the lower half of the audio track channel strip to show the master or submix
channel strip again. See Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about
audio track send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the track is routed, which you can
set to a submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output >
Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the track (respectively).
Click the audio track automation button to cycle through the three possible
states of audio track automation:
When off, the audio track will ignore automation data. If you have already
recorded or entered automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R)
and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off by pressing and
holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will
still use the effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the audio track will read automation data but will not
record any additional automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter
automation. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental
changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the audio track can record automation. (If you have
any Q-Link knobs assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to
touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
See Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation
by clicking the global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Click the Monitor button to set how your audio track will be monitored. Clicking it
will cycle through its three states:
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is recordenabled only.
When on, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is recordenabled.
When off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of
the track. The green level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current
volume level in dB.
Click the Record Arm () button to record-enable the track. When you begin
audio recording, the audio signal will be recorded to this track.
Tip: You can record-enable multiple tracks in Track View Mode or in the Channel
Mixer by pressing and holding Ctrl (Windows) or  (macOS) while clicking the
Arm button to each track.
See below for descriptions of the adjacent master channel strip.
57
Master & Submix Channel Strips
When viewing the master or submix channel strip:
The number of the pair of master outputs or submix are the bottom of the
channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for those outputs or
that submix. See Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about submix insert
effects.
For submix channel strips, click and drag the Send knobs, which control the
send levels for the track. See Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more
about submix send/return effects.
For submix channel strips, the menu below the Send knobs shows where the
submix is routed, which you can set to a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output
> Out 1,2–31,32) or a single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M to mute the master output or submix.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level
(respectively) of the outputs or submix. The green level meter next to the slider
shows the outputs’ or submix’s current volume level in dB.
58
Browser
You can use the File Browser, Expansion Browser, and Media Browser to
navigate your hard disks and other storage devices to load samples,
sequences, projects, MPC Expansions/instruments, and other media. Using
filter buttons and user-definable folders, you can easily adapt it to your preferred
workflow. You can also audition (preview) samples before loading them.
You can also use the Project Info Browser, Project Notes Browser, and
Undo History Browser to access and edit additional information about your
project overall.
The MIDI Learn Browser lets you assign areas of the MPC software to
external MIDI controllers. Global MIDI mappings are helpful if you use certain
MIDI controllers across multiple projects. Project MIDI mappings are saved
within a project, which can be helpful if your MIDI controller usage is particular
to each one. See Addenda > Updates in MPC 2.2 > New Features > MIDI
Learn for more information about this.
The Browser also includes the Quick Help panel. This panel is visible only
when one of the Browsers is shown. Click the menu icon (≡), select Help,
and then click Quick Help to show or hide this panel. Alternatively, click the ?
icon in the lower-right corner.
You can also click the feedback button () to suggest a feature or report a
bug. We always try to take your feedback into account as we continually
improve the MPC experience!
To show or hide the Browsers, do one of the following:
•
Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Browser, and then click the
desired option: File Browser, Expansion Browser, Media Browser,
Project Info, Project Notes, or Undo History.
•
In the lower-right corner, click the corresponding icon (as shown
from right to left):
o
File Browser: hard-drive icon
o
Expansion Browser: list icon
o
Media Browser: six-rectangles icon
o
Undo History Browser: clock-and-arrow icon
o
Project Notes Browser: notebook icon
o
Project Info Browser: P/page icon
o
MIDI Assignment Browser: MIDI-controller icon
59
File Browser
When the File Browser is selected, you can do any of the following:
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow () next to the file
path.
To select a file or folder, click it once.
To enter a folder, double-click it.
To load a sample directly to a pad, click and drag the sample onto a
pad in the lower half of the window.
To load a sample directly to an audio track, click and drag the
sample onto the Grid Editor when the Audio tab is selected or onto an
audio track when one is shown in the upper half of the window.
To load a selected file to the project’s sample pool, double-click it
or click and drag it anywhere in the window outside of the File
Browser. If the file is a sample, it will be loaded to the project’s sample
pool. If the file is a project, it will be loaded in its entirety (you will be
asked if you want to close your current project).
To load all files in a selected folder, click and drag the folder onto
anywhere in the window outside of the File Browser.
To preview a selected sound, click and hold Play () in the lower-left
corner of the Browser.
To enable or disable the audition function and set its volume level,
click the volume icon in the lower-left corner of the Browser. Click and
drag the level slider left or right to set the volume level.
To browse your files by search term, click the Search field and type
a search term.
To get the most efficient use of the File Browser, set the file paths to your
favorite drive locations first. There are five folder buttons labeled 1–5 at
the top. You can set these to be shortcuts to five locations on your
computer’s hard drive or any connected storage devices, giving you quick
access to your files.
To assign the current location to a folder button, press and hold Shift,
and then click one of the folder buttons (1–5). Now, when you click that
folder button again, the File Browser will show that folder’s content
immediately.
Use the five filter buttons to show only specific types of files in the list
below. Folders will still be shown in the list.
To show project files only, tap the Proj/page button.
To show sequence files only, tap the Seq/bars button.
To show program files only, tap the Prog/four-squares button.
To show sample files only, tap the Sample/waveform button.
To show all file types, tap the All button.
To show or hide MPC project folders, tap the MPC folder icon in the
lower-right corner.
60
Expansion Browser
When the Expansion Browser is selected:
Your available MPC Expansions will appear in the Browser, which you
can expand or collapse.
MPC Expansions may have lists of patches that you can expand or
collapse, as well.
To preview a selected sound, click and hold Play () in the lower-left
corner of the Browser.
To enable or disable the audition function and set its volume level,
click the volume icon in the lower-left corner of the Browser. Click and
drag the level slider left or right to set the volume level.
See Expansions to learn more about MPC Expansions.
61
Media Browser
When the Media Browser is selected:
Your MPC Expansions will appear under the Expansions panel, which you can expand or collapse.
You can filter through your media library in the Filter panel, which you can expand or collapse.
Use the Search field to browse your media by search term.
To preview a selected sound, click and hold Play () in the lower-left corner of the Browser.
To enable or disable the audition function and set its volume level, click the volume icon in the lower-left
corner of the Browser. Click and drag the level slider left or right to set the volume level.
Use the four filter buttons to show only specific types of files in the list below. Folders will still be shown in the list.
To show program files only, tap the Program/four-squares button.
To show project files only, tap the Project/page button.
To show sequence files only, tap the Sequence/bars button.
To show sample files only, tap the Sample/waveform button.
To enable or disable tags in the Media Browser, click the menu icon (≡), go to View > Browser, and select Media
Browser Shows All Tags.
Program filter + no tags selected.
Program filter + Kit and RbB tags.
Sample filter + Chill Trap and Kick tags.
62
Project Info Browser
When the Project Info Browser is selected:
All available programs and sequences in the project will appear in the
upper half of the Browser under Projects. A list of samples will appear
in the lower half under Samples (the samples that are listed are part of
the selected program or sequence under the Project list).
To duplicate a program in the project, right-click it and click
Duplicate. An identical program will be created immediately. The
duplicate program will use the same name but appended with a
number (e.g., Program 002).
To duplicate a program in the project and use it on a new track,
right-click it and click Duplicate to New Track. An identical program
and new track that uses it will be created immediately. The duplicate
program will use the same name but appended with a number (e.g.,
Program 002). The new track will be named Track and appended with
a number (e.g., Track 06).
To copy pads (and their parameters) from one program into another,
right-click the program and click Merge. This essentially consolidates
two programs into one. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more
information.
To delete samples from the project, click the trash can icon. In the
screen that appears, select Purge Unused Samples to delete all
unused samples from the project (from all programs, sequences, and
audio or MIDI tracks), or select Delete All Samples to delete all
samples from the project.
To delete a program or sample, right-click it and click Delete. Click
Delete or Delete Sample to confirm your choice or Cancel to cancel
the deletion.
To save a program or sample, right-click it and click Save. Use the
window that appears to enter a name for the program file (.xpm) or
sample file (.wav) and select a location. Click Save to confirm your
choice or Cancel to cancel saving.
To rename a program or sample, right-click it and click Rename.
Enter a name in the window that appears, and then click OK to confirm
your choice or Cancel to cancel saving.
To view a sample in Sample Edit Mode, right-click it and click Edit.
Alternatively, double-click the sample. You will immediately enter
Sample Edit Mode and show the sample’s waveform in the Wave
Editor.
To add the sample as an audio track, right-click it and click Add to
Audio Track. This will immediately create a new audio track named
Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002), and the sample
will be loaded on it.
This Browser is identical to the Project panel (see Panels > Project) but in
a vertical layout rather than horizontal.
63
Project Notes Browser
When the Project Notes Browser is selected:
Information about the project will be shown in several fields: Title,
Artist, Original Artist, Album, Year, Genre, and Copyright. Note that
these are not ID3 tags.
You can also write notes in the lower panel.
To enter text into a field, click it and type.
Undo History Browser
When the Undo History Browser is selected:
All undoable (and redoable) actions you have performed within the
software will appear in this list in sequence. Each step is
numbered in the # column. Each action is named in the Action
column with additional information in the Detail column.
The magenta action marker indicates the current “undo state”
location—the last-performed action.
To undo or redo multiple actions at once, click and drag the
action marker to the desired location in the list. The project will
immediately revert to that state. Actions that can be redone
(below the action marker) are grayed out.
64
MIDI Learn Browser
The MIDI Learn Browser lets you assign areas of the MPC software to external MIDI controllers. Global MIDI
mappings are helpful if you use certain MIDI controllers across multiple projects. Project MIDI mappings are saved
within a project, which can be helpful if your MIDI controller usage is particular to each one. See Addenda >
Updates in MPC 2.2 > New Features > MIDI Learn for more information about this.
65
Editors
You can switch the editor between the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, and List Editor, depending on what mode you are in.
To enter each editor, click Grid, Wave, or List below
the mode icons. You can do this only when editing
MIDI tracks; audio tracks have only the Grid Editor
that display the audio track waveform.
In all three editors, these buttons are available in the
upper-right corner:
Click the magnet icon to switch between the two
different modes of “snapping” note events to the grid:
Absolute or Relative.
Absolute: Events will “snap” to the nearest time
division on the grid (as determined by the TC
field or Time Correct window). This is the
typical and traditional method of using the snap/
quantization feature.
Relative: Events will “snap” to the nearest time
division on the grid (as determined by the TC
field or Time Correct window) plus the original
time position of the event (e.g., an event that is
originally three ticks past a time division on the
grid will snap only to positions that are three
ticks past every time division).
Click the Hitting Pad Selects All Events icon to turn
the feature on (red) or off (gray). When on, pressing a
pad will automatically select all note events for that
pad in the sequence on that track. When off, pressing
a pad will simply play its sound without selecting any
note events.
Click the left-arrow icon to undo your last action.
Click the right-arrow icon to redo the last action you
undid.
Click the Export Audio icon (star-and-waveform) to
export the track as an audio file (.wav). Once this is
done, the icon will be red. You can then click and
drag the icon onto your computer desktop or external
storage device to copy it to that location. Press and
hold Shift and click the icon to reset it to gray.
Click the Export MIDI icon (star-and-bars) to export
the track as a MIDI sequence. Once this is done, the
icon will be red. You can then click and drag the icon
onto your computer desktop or external storage
device to copy it to that location. Press and hold Shift
and click the icon to reset it to gray.
You can use the Drag & Drop tab in the Preferences
to determine precisely what is exported with each of
these features. See Preferences to learn about this.
Note: Audio tracks can be exported as 16-bit or 24bit, 44.1 kHz .wav files, and MIDI tracks are exported
as .mid files. These files placed in the [Exports] folder
in [your hard drive]\Documents\MPC.
66
Grid Editor
The Grid Editor has three different appearances: one for drum and clip programs; one for keygroup, plugin, MIDI, and
CV programs; and one for audio tracks.
MIDI
When the MIDI tab in the Inspector is selected, the Grid Editor lets you view and edit the note events of each MIDI
track of a sequence and their velocities.
For drum programs, the left column shows you all available pads in a vertical view with their corresponding data.
For keygroup, plugin, MIDI, and CV programs, the left column shows a vertical “piano roll” keyboard.
Grid Editor of a drum program.
Grid Editor of a keygroup program or MIDI program.
67
In the Grid Editor for MIDI tracks, these three icons enable you to use different functions in
the grid. Click one to select its mode:
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To enter a note in an empty grid square, click the square.
To select a note, click it.
To move a note, click and drag it to another grid square. Press and hold Shift while doing this to
move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To erase a note, double-click it.
To adjust the start or end point of a note, click and drag its left or right edge. Press and hold Shift
while doing this to adjust the start or end point without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a note, click it.
To select multiple notes, click and drag across the grid to create a box around them.
To move a note, click and drag it to another grid square. Press and hold Shift while doing this to
adjust the start or end point without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To move multiple notes, select them as described above, and then click and drag them. Press and
hold Shift while doing this to move them without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid.
To adjust the start or end point of a note, click and drag its left or right edge. Press and hold Shift
while doing this to adjust the start or end point without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Eraser: Erase Mode:
To erase a note, click it.
To zoom in or out, use the sliders in the lower-right corner of the Grid Editor (along each axis) or click the blue timeline
and drag down or up.
To show or hide the automation lane, click the up or down arrow (∧ or ∨) button next to the horizontal scroll bar
under the grid.
To adjust the velocity of the selected notes (manually), click Velocity in the automation lane below the grid to
select it, and then click and drag the handle/handles below the note/notes. Each note’s velocity is represented by a
vertical bar. The higher and more red the bar is, the higher the velocity is. The current velocity value will appear next
to the cursor.
Alternatively, select the pencil tool and click the desired height for each handle. You can also draw an automation
curve across the entire automation lane.
68
The automation curve can contain points at the current Time Correct intervals. Press and hold Shift while creating
and editing the automation curve to adjust it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To show the automation of an automatable parameter, click the down arrow () in the lower-left corner of the
Grid Editor. You can select a track, program, or pad parameter—the parameter name will appear below Modifier.
You can then use any of the tools to create and edit automation for this parameter in the automation lane.
To create a point in the automation curve, click the desired location with the pencil tool, or double-click the
desired location with any other tool. Press and hold Shift while clicking to create it without restricting
(“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To draw part or all of an automation curve, click and drag the desired curve with the pencil tool. Press and
hold Shift while clicking to draw it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To erase a point in the automation curve, click and drag over it with the eraser tool, or double-click it with
any other tool.
To erase part or all of an automation curve, click and drag over the desired section of the curve with the
eraser tool.
To select a point in the automation curve, click it.
To move a point in the automation curve, click and drag it to another location in the automation lane. Press
and hold Shift while clicking to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Each parameter in the automation lane has an icon next to it that indicates the type of parameter it is:
Note
Track Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo)
Track MIDI CC Automation (0–127)
Track Parameter Automation (Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Channel Pressure, or Program Change)
Program Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, or Send 1–4)
Program Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
Program Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Keygroup Mixer Automation (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Pad/Keygroup Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
Pad/Keygroup Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
69
Audio
When the Audio tab in the Inspector is selected, the Grid Editor lets you view and edit the audio waveform of each
audio track of a sequence.
In the Grid Editor for audio tracks, these six icons enable you to use
different functions in the grid. Click one to select its mode:
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a region of the audio track, click the light-blue strip at the top of it.
To select or deselect multiple track regions, press and hold Shift and click the light-blue strip at
the top of each one.
To move a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click the light-blue strip at the top of a
track region and drag it to the desired location. Press and hold Shift after clicking it to move it
without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid. You can move multiple regions as well.
To duplicate a track region (or multiple selected track regions), press and hold Alt (Windows) or
Option (macOS), click the light-blue strip at the top of a track region, and drag it to the desired
location. Press and hold Shift after clicking it to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the
quantization grid. You can duplicate multiple regions as well.
To split a track region at two specific points (creating track regions on either side and between
them), click and drag across anywhere in the upper two thirds of it to create a translucent white box,
and then click the light-blue strip at the top of it. You can do this to multiple track regions as well.
To shorten or lengthen a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click and drag the lower
third of its left or right edge. Press and hold Shift while dragging it to adjust the length without
restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
70
Arrow: Selection Mode:
To select a region of the audio track, click anywhere in the upper two thirds of it.
To select or deselect multiple track regions, press and hold Shift and click anywhere in the upper
two thirds of it of each one.
To move a track region, click and drag anywhere in the upper two thirds of it. Press and hold Shift
after clicking it to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To duplicate a track region (or multiple selected track regions), press and hold Alt (Windows) or
Option (macOS), click the light-blue strip at the top of a track region, and drag it to the desired
location. Press and hold Shift after clicking it to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the
quantization grid. You can duplicate multiple regions as well.
To adjust the start or end point of a track region, click and drag anywhere in the lower third of its
left or right edge. Press and hold Shift while doing this to adjust the start or end point without
restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To create a point in the automation curve, click the desired location in the automation lane. Press
and hold Shift while clicking to create it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To draw part or all of an automation curve, click and drag the desired curve in the automation lane.
Press and hold Shift while clicking to draw it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To select a point in the automation curve, click it.
To move a point in the automation curve, click and drag it to another location in the automation lane.
Press and hold Shift while clicking to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To erase a point in the automation curve, double-click it.
Eraser: Erase Mode:
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To erase a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click it. You may need to click it twice if
the track itself is not already selected.
To copy a track region, press and hold Alt (Windows) or Option (macOS) and then click and drag it.
To erase part or all of an automation curve, click and drag over the desired section of the curve in
the automation lane.
Scissors: Split Mode:
To select a track region, click its left edge.
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To split the track at a specific point (creating a track region on either side), click that point in the track.
To copy a track region, press and hold Alt (Windows) or Option (macOS) and then click and drag it.
Mute: Mute Mode:
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To mute or unmute a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click it.
To copy a track region, press and hold Alt (Windows) or Option (macOS) and then click and drag it.
71
To zoom in or out, use the slider in the lower-right corner of the Grid Editor or click the blue timeline and drag down
or up.
The Region field shows the name of the currently selected region of the audio track. Double-click it to rename the region.
Click the two-pages-and-+ icon to duplicate the currently selected region of the audio track. The duplicate region
will appear immediately after the original one.
Use the Fade In or Fade Out fields to create a fade-in or fade out for the currently selected region of the audio track.
The fades will be shown as a sloped line at the start or end of the region.
Use the Level slider to set the level of the currently selected region of the audio track. The waveform amplitude will
change accordingly. Alternatively, click the dB value next to the slider and enter the desired level.
Click M to mute or unmute currently selected region of the audio track.
Click Rev to reverse the currently selected region of the audio track.
To lengthen or shorten the currently selected region of the audio track without changing its pitch, click Warp,
which will enable the Semi, Fine, and BPM fields next to it. Use the BPM field to change the tempo, which will change
the length of the region accordingly. You can also click X2 to double the value or /2 to halve it. Use the Semi and Fine
fields if you want to change the pitch (this is useful for matching the durations of two samples with different pitches).
Tip: You can configure audio track recording to ensure the resulting track region is warped automatically. You can
then adjust the sequence tempo while track region remains in time. See Preferences > General to learn about this.
Note: When you record an audio file, the current sequence tempo will be embedded with it. This information is
stored within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track region, the warping algorithm
uses this sequence tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the “stretch factor.”
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
•
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Semi and Fine parameters) of warped audio.
•
Avoid warping very small track regions.
•
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
•
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
•
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample (see here to learn about this). After you flatten the pad, its
sample/samples no longer need to be warped.
•
Use a Warp algorithm other than Elastique Pro, which is very CPU-intensive. See Preferences > General to learn
how to change this.
•
Using a higher buffer size (usually above 256) can reduce the possibility of CPU issues. See Preferences > Audio
to learn how to do this.
72
To show or hide the automation lane, click the up or down arrow (∧ or ∨) button next to the horizontal scroll bar
under the grid.
The automation curve can contain points at the current Time Correct intervals. Press and hold Shift while creating
and editing the automation curve to adjust it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To show the automation of an automatable parameter, click the down arrow () in the lower-left corner of the Grid
Editor. You can select a track parameters only (for the mixer or insert effects)—the parameter name will appear below
Modifier. You can then use any of the tools to create and edit automation for this parameter in the automation lane.
To create a point in the automation curve, click the desired location with the pencil tool, or double-click the
desired location with any other tool. Press and hold Shift while clicking to create it without restricting
(“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To draw part or all of an automation curve, click and drag the desired curve with the pencil tool. Press and
hold Shift while clicking to draw it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To erase a point in the automation curve, click and drag over it with the eraser tool, or double-click it with
any other tool.
To erase part or all of an automation curve, click and drag over the desired section of the curve with the
eraser tool.
To select a point in the automation curve, click it.
To move a point in the automation curve, click and drag it to another location in the automation lane. Press
and hold Shift while clicking to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Each parameter in the automation lane has an icon next to it that indicates the type of parameter it is:
Audio Track Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo) or Insert Effect Automation (options vary based
on the effect)
73
Wave Editor
The Wave Editor lets you view and edit the samples in a project.
The selected pad (e.g, A01, B16, etc.) is shown just below the Grid Editor tab. Click a pad in the Pads panel or
press a pad to select it.
Use the Layer menu to select the layer (of the current pad) with the sample you want to view.
Use the Sample menu to change the sample assigned to the current pad.
Important: The following parameters work in conjunction with Chop Mode (in Sample Edit Mode). Here’s how it works:
When working in Sample Edit Mode and using Chop Mode to divide a sample into slices for your pads, you can
convert a slice using Non-Destructive Slice or Pad Parameters.
A Non-Destructive Slice will let its pad to refer to that slice when you press it; the original sample remains intact and
each slice marker is like a “bookmark” for a pad. In Program Edit Mode, you’ll see that the pad/layer to which it’s
assigned has its Slice drop-down menu set to the corresponding slice number in the original sample. Playing that
pad will cause it to refer to that slice marker like a “bookmark” instead of creating an entirely new sample of that
slice. This means that you no longer have to clutter your Project with a new sample for every slice (though you can
still use this earlier method, if you prefer).
A slice converted using Pad Parameters is very similar to a non-destructive slice described above. The difference is
that in Program Edit Mode, the pads/layers they’re assigned to have their Slice drop-down menus set to Pad (instead
of the slice number), and the Pad Start and Pad End points will correspond to the slice markers in the original sample.
See Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode to learn more about this.
Use the Start field to determine the position (in samples) where the pad’s playback will start. The minimum value is
0, and the maximum value is the End value.
Note: When Loop Lock is on, the loop position (as determined in the Loop field) is the same as the pad start. When
off, the loop position is independent from the pad start.
Use the End field to determine the position (in samples) where the pad’s playback will stop. The minimum value is
the Start value, and the maximum value is the sample’s total length (in samples).
74
Use the Loop menu to select the Pad Loop mode.
Important: For Pad Loop to work, you must (1) set the Sample Play field to Note On in the Pad Play Modes section
of Program Edit Mode (see Modes > Program Edit Mode) and (2) set the Slice field to Pad.
Off: The sample will not loop.
Fwd: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to repeat from the Loop position to the end of the
sample. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
Rev: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play in reverse, repeating from the end of the sample to
the Loop position. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
Alt: You can hold down the pad to cause that sample to play from the Loop position to the end of the sample
and then play in reverse until it reaches the Loop position again. This will repeat as long as you are holding the
pad down. Release the pad to stop the repeating playback.
Click the lock icon to turn Loop Lock on or off. When on, the lock icon will be red
and the Loop field will be disabled.
Use the Slice field to select what part/parts of the sample will play:
All: The entire sample will play.
Pad: The sample will play from the Start position to the End position. This also lets you activate Pad Loop.
Slice 1, 2, 3, etc.: If you have sliced the sample in Chop Mode, you can select which slice will play when you
trigger the pad.
Use the Offset field to determine a time offset for the sample’s playback.
Positive values: When the pad is played, playback will start immediately but at a later point in the sample
specified by the offset value.
Negative values: When the pad is played, playback will be delayed by the amount specified by the offset value.
Click Rev to reverse the sample’s playback.
Click Warp to lengthen or shorten the sample (based on the BPM) without changing its pitch.
Use the Stretch field to set the “stretch factor,” which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is on).
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo, which affects how the sample is warped (if Warp is on). You can also click X2 to
double the value or /2 to halve it.
Click the circular-arrows icon to enable or disable BPM Sync. When BPM Sync and Warp are both enabled, the
sample’s BPM will be “locked” to the tempo of the sequence. When BPM Sync is disabled but Warp is enabled, the
sample will be independent of the tempo of your sequence—use the Stretch field to lengthen or shorten a sample.
Tip: You can configure audio track recording to ensure the resulting track region is warped automatically. You can
then adjust the sequence tempo while track region remains in time. See Preferences > General to learn about this.
Note: When you record an audio file, the current sequence tempo will be embedded with it. This information is
stored within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track region, the warping algorithm
uses this sequence tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the “stretch factor.”
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by
doing any/all of the following:
• Avoid using extreme Stretch values, especially anything below 100.
• Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment (e.g., the Semi and Fine parameters) of warped audio.
• Avoid warping very small track regions.
• Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number of voices of the
polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially instances where the warped regions start
at the same time.
• Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
• If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad function to consolidate the
affected pad’s layers into one audio sample (see here to learn about this). After you flatten the pad, its
sample/samples no longer need to be warped.
• Use a Warp algorithm other than Elastique Pro, which is very CPU-intensive. See Preferences > General to
learn how to change this.
• Using a higher buffer size (usually above 256) can reduce the possibility of CPU issues. See Preferences >
Audio to learn how to do this.
75
Click the gear icon to enable or disable Link Slices and Zero Snap, to select
an editing process (Process Sample), to set the Slice Preview behavior:
Link Slices: When Link Slices is set to On, changing the start point of a
slice (after you have created slices of a sample in Chop Mode) will also
change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing the end
point of a slice will also change the start point of the next slice. When set
to Off, you can create slices that are nonsequential, noncontiguous, or
overlapping. This is the same as clicking the Link Slices button in the QLinks panel in Sample Edit Mode.
Process Sample: Select an editing process to apply to the sample. These
are the same processes available in Sample Edit Mode while in Program
Mode (see Modes > Sample Edit Mode > Program Mode to learn more).
Slice Preview: This determines if/how audio is played as you move a slice
marker. As you move the slice marker through a sample waveform, you
can set it to play the small part of the sample before the slice marker
(Before), play the small part of the sample after the slice marker (After), or
not play at all (Off). You can also configure this setting in the Preferences
(see Preferences > General).
Zero Snap: Enable Zero Snap to force start points, end points, and loop
points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.” This can help to
avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample. This is the same as
clicking the Zero Snap button in the Q-Links panel in Sample Edit Mode.
The large waveform display shows the “active” section of the sample waveform.
The strip above the large display shows an overview of the entire sample
waveform. If the waveform display is showing only part of the entire sample
waveform, a white box in the overview will indicate the current position.
The timeline provides a reference for the length of the sample. Click the down
arrow () or right-click anywhere on the timeline to select the increments it
will use: Time (secs:ms), Samples, or Beats.
Scroll left or right on the waveform to move through it. Use the sliders in the
lower-right corner or click the timeline and drag down or up to zoom in or out.
The green marker and red marker are the start point and end point (respectively).
These two points define the region of the sample that will be played.
76
List Editor
In the List Editor, you can perform the same operations as in the Grid Editor but with a different interface/workflow.
The sequence for the track will be shown as a list of events, with the following parameters:
#: This is number of the note event.
Time: This is the position of the note event in bars, beats, and ticks. Hover the mouse over the value to see its
equivalent in pulses. If multiple note events occur at the same time, additional note events will be listed
immediately below, but their Time values will be grayed out.
Event Type: This icon indicates the type of event (e.g., Note, Aftertouch, Track Automation, etc.). See the
description of the View menu below for a list of types of events to learn how to show only specific ones.
Pad/Note: This is the pad and/or corresponding MIDI note number. For drum programs, you will see the pad
number. For keygroup programs, plugin programs, and midi programs, you will see the note.
Length: This is the length of the note event in ticks. Click and drag the field to adjust it.
Velocity: This is the velocity of the note event with a velocity bar of corresponding color and length below it.
Click and drag the field to adjust it.
Mod Type: This is the type of modifier used on the note event via automation.
Value: This is the value of the modifier automation. Click and drag the field to adjust it.
To edit the parameters of an event, double-click it. In the window that appears, use the fields and menus to edit
the event. Click OK to confirm your edits or Cancel to close with window without changing anything.
To show or hide specific parameter columns, right-click one of the parameter names, and
select the parameter column to show or hide. You can also choose to Auto-size this column or
Auto-size all columns to fit the contents.
The red arrow () on the left side of the list represents the playhead’s current position. If your
sequence is playing, the arrow will move accordingly.
77
Click the View menu in the lower-right corner of the List Editor to select which
types of events are shown in the list.
All: Select this option to show all event types.
Notes: Select this option to show only notes.
Aftertouch: Select this option to show only aftertouch messages.
Track Automation: Select this option to show only track automation events.
Program Automation: Select this option to show only program automation
events.
Pitch Bend: Select this option to show only pitch bend events.
Control Change: Select this option to show only MIDI CC messages.
Program Change: Select this option to show only MIDI program change.
Ch Pressure: Select this option to show only channel pressure messages.
Solo/Mute: Select this option to show only solo and mute events for tracks,
programs, and pads.
Other: Select this option to show other types of events not listed above,
such as pad or keygroup parameters.
The following icons indicate the corresponding types of events:
Note
Track Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo)
Track MIDI CC Automation (0–127)
Track Parameter Automation (Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Channel Pressure, or Program Change)
Program Mixer Automation (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, or Send 1–4)
Program Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
Program Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Keygroup Mixer Automation (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Pad/Keygroup Parameter Automation (options vary based on the type of program)
Pad/Keygroup Insert Effect Automation (options vary based on the effect)
78
To insert a step in the list, click the + icon in the lower-right corner, and select one of the options:
Note: Select this option to create a note in the list. The note will be at the earliest possible location not occupied
by another note played by that pad. (This location takes the Time Correct settings into account.)
Track: Select this option to create a track automation event. You can select:
a track mixer parameter: Mixer > Volume, Pan, Mute or Solo
a MIDI CC: 0–127
a track-specific parameter: Aftertouch, Pitchbend, Channel Pressure, or Program Change
Program: Select this option to create a program automation event. Tracks using MIDI programs do not have this
option. You can select:
a program mixer parameter: Mixer > Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, or Send 1–4
a program insert effect parameter (options vary based on the effect)
Pad/Keygroup: Select this option to create a pad or keygroup automation event. You can select:
a pad or keygroup mixer parameter (Mixer > Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
a pad, keygroup, or clip program parameter (options vary based on the type of program)
a pad, keygroup, or clip insert effect parameter (options vary based on the effect)
To duplicate the currently selected step in the list, click the two-pages-and-+ icon in the lower-right corner.
79
Track View
In Track View Mode, the Channel Mixer, and Track Mute Mode, the upper half of the window will show the Track View,
an overview of MIDI tracks, audio tracks, and programs as horizontal strips. Each horizontal strip represents a track
in the current sequence. MIDI tracks are listed first, audio tracks are listed second, and programs are listed third.
These buttons are available in the upper-right corner:
Click the left-arrow icon to undo your last action.
Click the right-arrow icon to redo the last action you undid.
Click menu icon (≡) in the upper-right corner, and select or deselect Show
Unused Tracks, Show Programs, Show Audio Tracks, and Show Midi
Tracks. Only selected items will be shown in the Track View.
To move through the list of tracks and programs, scroll up or down.
To expand or collapse each group of tracks or programs, click the > or ∨ above the first track of each type.
All MIDI tracks in the sequence are grouped together.
Click a MIDI track strip to select it.
Click the menu below the track name (above the M and S buttons) to select what program the track uses.
Click the M or S button to mute or solo the track (respectively).
All audio tracks in the sequence are grouped together.
Click an audio track strip to select it.
Click the M or S button to mute or solo the track (respectively).
Click the Arm button to record-enable the track. When you begin audio recording, the audio signal will be
recorded to this track. You can select multiple tracks by pressing and holding Ctrl (Windows) or  (macOS)
while clicking the Arm button to each track.
Click the Monitor button to set how your audio track will be monitored. Clicking it will cycle through its three states:
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
When on, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
When off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
All programs in the sequence are grouped together.
Click a program strip to select it.
Click the M or S button to mute or solo the program (respectively).
80
Above the tracks and programs are buttons and a menu that let you draw or edit track regions or automation.
Click the automation icon in the upper-left corner of the tracks to show or hide automation. When
automation is hidden, you can edit the track regions.
When the automation icon is off (gray), you can edit your tracks using the tools at the top of the Track View.
Click one to select its mode:
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a track region, click the upper third of it. You may need to click it twice if the track itself is
not already selected.
To select or deselect multiple track regions, press and hold Shift and click the upper third of each
one. You can select multiple regions within the same track or across different tracks, though you
may need to click it twice if the track itself is not already selected.
To move a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click the upper third of a track region and
drag it to the desired location. Press and hold Shift while dragging it to move it without restricting
(“snapping”) it to the quantization grid. You can move multiple regions within the same tracks or
between different tracks, though you cannot move a MIDI track region onto an audio track or vice versa.
To split a track region at two specific points (creating track regions on either side and between
them), click and drag across the middle third of it to create a translucent white box, and then click
the upper third of that box. You can do this to multiple track regions as well.
To shorten or lengthen a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click and drag the lower
third of its left or right edge. Press and hold Shift while dragging it to adjust the length without
restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Arrow: Selection Mode:
To select a track region, click anywhere in the upper two thirds of it. You may need to click it twice
if the track itself is not already selected.
To select or deselect multiple track regions, press and hold Shift and click anywhere in the upper
two thirds of each one. You can select multiple regions within the same track or across different
tracks, though you may need to click it twice if the track itself is not already selected.
To move a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click the upper third of a track region and
drag it to the desired location. Press and hold Shift while dragging it to move it without restricting
(“snapping”) it to the quantization grid. You can move multiple regions within the same tracks or
between different tracks, though you cannot move a MIDI track region onto an audio track or vice versa.
To shorten or lengthen a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click and drag the lower
third of its left or right edge. Press and hold Shift while dragging it to adjust the length without
restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
Eraser: Erase Mode:
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To erase a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click it. You may need to click it twice if
the track itself is not already selected.
81
Scissors: Split Mode:
To select a track region, click its left edge.
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To split the track at a specific point (creating a track region on either side), click that point in the
track. You may need to click it twice if the track itself is not already selected.
Mute: Mute Mode:
To select multiple track regions, click and drag from an empty location on a track to create a
translucent white box. Click an empty location on the grid to deselect them.
To mute or unmute a track region (or multiple selected track regions), click it.
When the automation icon is on (white), you can select an automation curve to show and edit.
Click the menu in the upper-left of the tracks to show the automation curve of a parameter. You
can then use the pencil or marquee tool to create and edit automation curve for this parameter in
each track strip or program strip.
See the Automation chapter to learn more about automating parameters for MIDI tracks, audio
tracks, programs, and pads.
Important: An automation curve consists of several points placed according to current time
division—aligned with the quantization grid). You can create or move points without restricting
them to the time division by pressing and holding Shift.
Click one to select its mode:
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To create a point, click the desired location in the track strip or program strip.
To select a point, click it.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the track strip or program strip.
To erase a point, double-click it.
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a point, click it.
To select points, click and drag across the track strip or program strip to create a box around them.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the track strip or program strip. Press and
hold Shift while doing this to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To move multiple points, select them as described above, and then click and drag them to another
location in the track strip or program strip. Press and hold Shift while doing this to move them
without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid.
MIDI track, audio track, and program strips appear slightly differently while displaying their automation curves:
MIDI track:
Audio track:
Program:
82
Mixer Window
If you want to see channel strips for both the Pad Mixer and the Channel Mixer at the same time, you can open the
Mixer Window, which provides an overview of the channel strips in both modes in one screen.
To open or close the mixer window, do one of the following:
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View and click Show Mixer Window.
•
Click the two-sliders icon in the lower-left corner of the window.
The upper half of this window shows the Pad Mixer channel strips (see Modes > Pad Mixer to learn about these).
The lower half of the window shows the Channel Mixer channel strips (see Modes > Channel Mixer to learn about these).
All selectors and channel strips work as they normally do in their respective modes.
Tip: This window can be very helpful when using a dual-monitor computer setup.
Use the three icons at the top of the window to select which channel strips are shown:
Click the pad-and-slider icon to show just the Pad Mixer channel strips.
Click the two-sliders icon to show just the Channel Mixer channel strips.
Click the pad-and-three-sliders icon to show both Pad Mixer and Channel Mixer channel strips.
83
Panels
In several modes, the lower half of the window shows
several different panels.
To show or hide each panel, click its selector.
To show or hide the entire lower panel, click the twopanels icon in the lower-left corner of the window.
This chapter describes the available panels.
Note: Similar to these panels, the lower half of the window
of the Pad Mixer and Channel Mixer shows several different
channel strips, which you can show or hide by clicking the
selectors. See Modes > Pad Mixer and Modes > Channel
Mixer chapter to learn about these.
MIDI Keyboard
The MIDI keyboard feature is a graphical representation of a piano keyboard at the bottom of the window.
To show or hide the MIDI keyboard, do one of the following:
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View and click Show MIDI Keyboard.
•
Click the two-panels icon in the lower-left corner of the window.
Whenever a note is played (by pressing a pad, playing the current sequence, etc.), the corresponding keys on the
MIDI keyboard will be lit, appearing to be “played.” These keys will correspond to the notes played in the current
track only.
Similarly, you can click keys on the MIDI keyboard to trigger those notes on the current track. This can be useful for
auditioning the sound of the track’s program in different octaves.
Click the left-arrow or right-arrow button on either side of the MIDI keyboard to shift the range of the keys displayed
in the window.
If the MIDI Keys feature is enabled, the corresponding computer keyboard
character will be shown above each key, though you can still use MIDI keys even if
it is hidden. Furthermore, you can use the MIDI keyboard even if MIDI Keys is
disabled. See Toolbar > Menu > Tools to learn about this feature.
84
Q-Links
The Q-Links panel shows the 16 Q-Link knobs with their assigned
parameters listed below.
Click the Q-Link Mode menu to select the current edit mode of the Q-Link
knobs:
Project: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 parameters
within the current project overall. See the following Project section to
learn how to use this mode.
Program: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs can control 16 program
or audio track parameters. See the following Program section to learn
how to use this mode.
Pad Scene (for drum programs only): In this edit mode, the Q-Link
knobs can control 16 parameters for the currently selected pad. See
the following Pad Scene section to learn how to use this mode.
Pad Parameters: In this edit mode, the 16 Q-Link knobs correspond to
the 16 pads, each one controlling the same parameter for each pad.
This is useful if you need to adjust the same parameter on multiple pads
at once rather than having to select and edit each pad individually. See
the following Pad Parameters section to learn how to use this mode.
Screen: In this edit mode, the Q-Link knobs will control a default
parameter or group of parameters in your currently selected mode
(e.g., Main Mode, Sample Edit Mode, etc.).
Note: When using MPC hardware with four Q-Link knobs (e.g., MPC Live,
MPC Touch, etc.), a gold rectangle in this panel indicates the four knobs
that can be controlled by that bank of four Q-Link knobs.
While in any Q-Link Mode other than Screen Mode, click the Learn button to
turn Learn Mode on or off. When on, adjusting a control in the MPC software
window will immediately assign it to the currently selected Q-Link knob.
To assign a function to a Q-Link knob in Learn Mode:
1. Click Learn so the button is lit. (This will stop playback. Resuming
playback will exit Learn Mode.)
2. Click the desired Q-Link knob.
3. Click the control in the software that you want to assign to the Q-Link
knob. The Q-Link knob will be able to control that parameter immediately.
To assign functions to other Q-Link knobs, repeat Steps 2–3.
To clear an assignment from a Q-Link knob, see the following Q-Link
Setup section.
To exit Learn Mode, click Learn (or resume playback).
85
Q-Link Setup
To show or hide the Q-Link Setup subpanel, click
the i icon in the upper-right corner of the Q-Links
panel.
The top of this subpanel shows the currently selected
Q-Link knob number.
The Source menu indicates where the parameter
assigned to that Q-Link knob is. The available
sources depend on the Q-Link Mode as described in
the following sections.
The Q-Link Parameter menu indicates the parameter
that the currently selected Q-Link knob controls.
Click the Momentary box to turn momentary behavior
on or off.
When on, moving the Q-Link knob will adjust its
parameter, but the parameter will immediately
return to its original position (when you turned
Momentary on) when you release the Q-Link knob.
When off, moving the Q-Link knob will adjust its
parameter, and the parameter will remain at its
new setting when you release the Q-Link knob.
Project
In the Project Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control 16 parameters within the current project.
These are the available sources for each Q-Link knob:
MIDI Track: MIDI track parameters—select one of the MIDI tracks in your project.
Audio Track: audio track parameters—select one of the audio tracks in your project.
Program: program parameters—select one of the programs in your project. For drum programs and clip
programs, you can select either the entire program or a specific pad within it.
Return: return mixer parameters (Returns 1–4).
Submix: submixer parameters (Submixes 1–8).
Master: master mixer parameters (Outputs 1/2–31/32).
These are the available parameters for each Q-Link knob:
Mixer: mixer parameters (options vary based on the Source)
Program: program parameters (options vary based on the type of program; available only if the Source is a
drum program, MIDI program, clip program, or CV program)
Insert 1–4: insert effect parameters (options vary based on the effect; available only if the Source has an insert
effect loaded)
86
Program
In the Program Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control 16 parameters within the currently selected program or
audio track.
These are the available sources for each Q-Link knob:
Program or Audio Track: program or audio track parameters—select the program or audio track. For drum
programs and clip programs, you can select either the entire program or a specific pad within it.
These are the available parameters for each Q-Link knob:
Mixer: program mixer parameters (options vary based on the Source)
Program: program parameters (options vary based on the type of program; available only if the Source is a
drum program, MIDI program, clip program, or CV program, not an audio track)
Insert 1–4: insert effect parameters (options vary based on the effect; available only if the Source has an insert
effect loaded)
Pad Scene
In the Pad Scene Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control your favorite 16 parameters for the currently selected
pad. You can select another pad simply by pressing it, allowing you to adjust the same 16 parameters for that new
pad. (These 16 parameter assignments are automatically saved with other user settings. Any project you load will use
these assignments.)
This option works for drum programs only.
The only available sources for each Q-Link knob are pads within a drum program.
To select a pad, press it.
These are the available parameters for each Q-Link knob:
Mixer: pad mixer parameters (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Program: pad parameters (i.e., parameters used in Program Edit Mode)
Pad Parameters
In the Pad Parameters Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs control the same pad parameter for each of the 16 pads
in the current pad bank.
For example, if the Parameter is set to Level, the 16 Q-Link knobs will adjust the 16 independent Level settings for
each pad in the current pad bank. You could then set the Parameter to Pan and use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the
panning of all 16 pads.
This option works for drum programs only.
The only available sources for each Q-Link knob are pads within a drum program.
To select a pad, press it.
These are the available parameters for each Q-Link knob:
Mixer: pad mixer parameters (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
Program: pad parameters (i.e., parameters used in Program Edit Mode)
Screen
In the Screen Q-Link Edit Mode, the Q-Link knobs will control a default parameter or group of parameters in your
currently selected mode (e.g., Main Mode, Sample Edit Mode, etc.).
87
Pads
The Pads panel shows the 16 pads with their assigned samples. All pads will
display their assigned colors.
Click a Pad Bank letter at the top of this panel to select a pad bank.
Each pad will display different contents, depending on the current mode.
See the description of this panel in the chapter for each mode.
Each pad can also display a color, which you can customize for each
program. See Pad Color to learn how to do this.
Program Editor
The Program Editor panel contains the parameters for Program Edit Mode, which vary depending on the type of
program. Learn about the specific parameters for each program type in Modes > Program Edit Mode.
88
Parameters
The Parameters panel shows the available parameters and editing processes
in Sample Edit Mode.
See the Modes > Sample Edit Mode chapter to learn more about this panel
and its different features in Trim Mode, Chop Mode, and Program Mode.
Project
The Project panel is a list of all available programs,
sequences, and samples in the project.
To duplicate a program in the project, right-click
it and click Duplicate. An identical program will be
created immediately. The duplicate program will
use the same name but appended with a number
(e.g., Program 002).
To duplicate a program in the project and use it
on a new track, right-click it and click Duplicate
to New Track. An identical program and new track
that uses it will be created immediately. The
duplicate program will use the same name but
appended with a number (e.g., Program 002). The
new track will be named Track and appended with
a number (e.g., Track 06).
To copy pads (and their parameters) from one program into another, right-click the program and click Merge.
This essentially consolidates two programs into one. See Editing Processes > Sequence for more information.
To delete samples from the project, click the trash can icon. In the screen that appears, select Purge Unused
Samples to delete all unused samples from the project (from all programs, sequences, and audio or MIDI tracks),
or select Delete All Samples to delete all samples from the project.
To delete a program or sample, right-click it and click Delete. Click Delete or Delete Sample to confirm your
choice or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
To save a program or sample, right-click it and click Save. Use the window that appears to enter a name for
the program file (.xpm) or sample file (.wav) and select a location. Click Save to confirm your choice or Cancel to
cancel saving.
To rename a program or sample, right-click it and click Rename. Enter a name in the window that appears,
and then click OK to confirm your choice or Cancel to cancel saving.
To view a sample in Sample Edit Mode, right-click it and click Edit. Alternatively, double-click the sample. You
will immediately enter Sample Edit Mode and show the sample’s waveform in the Wave Editor.
To add the sample as an audio track, right-click it and click Add to current audio track. This will immediately
create a new audio track named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002), and the sample will be
loaded on it.
This panel is identical to the Project Info Browser (see Browser > Project Info Browser) but in a horizontal layout
rather than vertical.
89
Sampler & Looper
The Sampler and Looper panels show similar
controls for setting levels, monitoring, inputs,
and effects of your incoming audio signal.
See Modes > Sampler and Modes > Looper to
learn more about each one.
Pad Banks & Mute
The Pad Banks and Mute panels let you select pads, assign pad or track groups, and adjust timing correct settings
in Pad Mute Mode and Track Mute Mode.
See Modes > Pad Mute Mode and Modes > Track Mute Mode to learn more about each one.
90
Sequence List
The Sequence List panel has different appearances in
Next Sequence Mode and Song Mode.
In Next Sequence Mode, it shows a list of all available
sequences in your project as well as their length and
tempo. See Modes > Next Sequence Mode to learn
about this.
In Song Mode, it shows the list of steps in the song,
including the number of repeats, the tempo of each
sequence, and the length of each step. See Modes >
Song Mode to learn about this.
Performance Controls
The Performance Controls panel shows the available
commands you can execute in Next Sequence Mode.
See Modes > Next Sequence Mode to learn about this.
Song Parameters
The Song Parameters panel shows the available controls
to create a song in Song Mode. This includes controls for
inserting and deleting song steps, a sequence selector for
the current step, and parameters that determine how long
each step plays.
See Modes > Song Mode to learn about this.
91
Preferences
The Preferences window contains many customizable elements of the software. Click the corresponding tab on the
left to select it (e.g., MIDI, Sequencer, etc.). Click the OK button to close the Preferences window. Changes to the
Preferences are saved automatically except for Vintage Mode (in the General tab) and Start Time (in the Sync tab).
To open the Preferences:
Windows: Click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click Preferences.
macOS: Click the MPC menu, and click Preferences.
Audio
Audio Device Type and Device or Output & Input: Click these drop-down menus to select an audio hardware
driver in your computer system.
Test: Click this button to play a test tone. This is for checking your audio output. Careful! You should lower the
volume on your audio system beforehand.
Sample Rate: Click this to drop-down menu to select the desired sample rate for your project. This depends on
the available sample rates of the type of MPC hardware you are using or of your audio interface (i.e., select
96000 Hz only if your interface allows a 96 kHz sample rate).
Audio Buffer Size: Click this drop-down menu to set your audio system’s latency. Lower values result in a more
immediate playing response but also more CPU consumption. If you are working with larger projects, this may
cause audible clicks and pops. Higher values are more CPU-friendly but can produce more delay between
pressing a pad and hearing the corresponding sound. The ideal audio buffer size also depends on your
computer’s CPU performance. Experiment with this to find the best setting for your system.
Latency Adjust: This indicates the amount of latency (delay) in your audio system.
MIDI
Active Midi Inputs: These boxes represent the active installed MIDI inputs on your computer system.
Midi Mapping: Click each drop-down menu to define the Midi Out Port A to D. Here, you can select the MIDI
output your sequencer data is routed to.
Note: When using the MPC software as a plugin, the only option you can select for your Midi Out Port is your
host software (DAW).
Plugins
Here you can select up to four locations on your hard disk where the software will look for installed VST or AU
plugins that you can use in the MPC software.
Click the … button to the right of the field to select a desired location. After selecting a new location, we recommend
using the Scan New function. When you configure these Plugin tab settings for the first time, you should click
Rescan All to perform a complete scan of all selected plugin locations.
See the Plugins chapter to learn about managing your plugins once they are scanned.
Sequencer
The settings on this screen determine how sequencing works in Grid Editor and in the Step Sequencer.
Display Resolution: This is the display resolution (in PPQN—pulses per quarter note) of pulse values in certain
areas of the operating system. Please note that this setting affects the display resolution, not the timing.
Instant Track Mute: When disabled, if you mute a track, its Note On messages will be ignored, and samples and
notes that are playing will finish playing their entire length (this is how legacy MPCs’ track-muting worked). This is
useful if you are using loops and want a loop to play to the end of a bar but not play the next time the sequence
loops. When enabled, if you mute a track, the MIDI track volume (0) will be sent. The loop will continue to play
but at zero volume, allowing the loop to continue playing when the track is unmuted. This is useful when you
want to have the track muted immediately.
92
Play Track Mute and Solo Events: When enabled, track mute and solo events are played back when you are in
Track Mute Mode. When disabled, track mute and solo events will not be played back while in Track Mute Mode.
Record Track Mute and Solo Events: When enabled, track mute and solo events are recorded when you are in
Track Mute Mode (timing correct settings will affect the recorded position events). When disabled, track mute
and solo events will not be recorded while in Track Mute Mode. This feature is useful if you want to use Track
Mute Mode to record track mutes or solos into your sequences as opposed to using Track Mute Mode for
performance or listening purposes only.
Record Pad Aftertouch Events: When enabled, pad aftertouch data (from your MPC hardware’s pressuresensitive pads) will be recorded. When disabled, pad aftertouch data will be ignored.
Place Events Recorded During Count-In at Start Point: When enabled, pressing a pad during the recording’s
pre-count will record that note event at the start of the recording (this is how the MPC3000 worked). When
disabled, no notes will be recorded until the pre-count is finished and recording has begun.
Truncate Duration: This determines if/how events are cropped if they exceed the length of the current Sequence:
To Sequence Length: If the length of an event exceeds the length of the sequence, it will be truncated. This
ensures that the event will not overlap itself when the sequence loops.
To Sequence End: If an event exceeds the length of the sequence, it will be truncated to the end of the
current sequence. In other words, the event will stop playing when the sequence ends or loops.
As Played: Events will play back exactly as they were recorded, even if they overlap themselves when the
sequence loops.
Q-Link Swing Applied On Release: When this box is selected, moving the Swing parameter assigned to a QLink knob will apply the timing correct settings (including the new Swing value) when you release the knob.
Sync
The settings on this screen determine how the MPC software synchronizes with connected USB and MIDI devices.
Receive: This determines whether the MPC software receives MIDI Clock information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time Code
information (MIDI Time Code (MTC)), communication from Ableton Link, or no synchronization information (Off).
MTC Frame Rate: This determines the frame rate used by MIDI Time Code (MTC), which is important for correct
timing, especially when working on film scoring projects: 24, 25, 30 drop, or 30 non-drop. In most cases, you
should select 25.
Send: This determines whether the MPC software sends MIDI Clock information (MIDI Clock), MIDI Time Code
information (MIDI Time Code (MTC)), or neither (Off).
Start Time: This is the starting time that will be sent when Send MIDI is set to anything other than Off. The time
is formatted in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
To: These are the MIDI ports over which MIDI Clock or MTC information will be sent.
MIDI Machine Control (MMC):
Receive: When enabled, the MPC software will be able to receive MIDI Machine Control (MMC) information.
When disabled, the MPC software will not receive this information.
Send: When enabled, the MPC software will be able to send MIDI Machine Control (MMC) information. When
disabled, the MPC software will not send this information.
93
Hardware
The settings on this screen determine the behavior of your MPC hardware’s pads as well as connected footswitches.
Pad Threshold: This determines how much force is required to strike the pads for them to trigger.
Pad Sensitivity: This determines how the pads respond to touch. At lower values, you need to use more force to
generate a high-velocity note. At higher values, it is easier to generate high-velocity notes, even if you do not use
much force while pressing a pad.
Pad Curve: This determines how striking the pads translates into velocity values. The A MIDI
Velocity
curve is essentially linear, while the B, C, and D curves are exponential.
Pad Response (Velocity & Aftertouch): View these meters when striking and pressing
the pads to help gauge the force and pressure you are applying to them. These meters
are useful when adjusting the Pad Threshold and Pad Sensitivity parameters (above).
Footswitch 1 & Footswitch 2: These determine how footswitches connected to your
MPC hardware will work. You can select either transport commands (e.g., Play or Stop)
or trigger commands for pads and other buttons.
Applied
Force
Display: This determines how the display functions for a connected MPC Touch.
Screen Dimming: This determines how much time must pass before your MPC hardware automatically dims its
touchscreen (if if it uses a battery, this can help preserve battery life).
VU Meter Source (only when using MPC X in Controller Mode): This determines what audio signal level is shown
in the level meters (on the right side of the screen). When set to Master, the level meters show the audio signal
sent out of Outputs 1/2 (the Main L/R outputs on the rear panel). When set to Current Program, the level
meters show the audio signal of the currently selected program (i.e., the program used by the currently selected
track and any other tracks that also use it).
Show Hardware Info: Click this button to open a window with information about your connected MPC hardware
(firmware version, driver version, etc.).
Project Defaults
The settings on this screen determine various default values for any new project that you create.
Default Tempo: This is the default tempo in BPM.
Default Master Tempo: When set to On, the default tempo value will be used for the master tempo. When set to
Off, the default tempo will be used for sequences.
Default Sequence Bars: This determines the default number of bars of a new sequence.
Default Time Signature (Numerator/Denominator): This determines the default time signature of a new sequence.
The numerator is the number of beats per bar, while the denominator is the value of each beat.
Default Pad Slice: This determines how new samples will play when you load them or record them into a
project. When set to Pad, the Slice menu in Program Edit Mode will be set to Pad, which lets you set the start
point, end point, etc. for the layer. When set to All, the Slice menu in Program Edit Mode will be set to All, in
which the entire sample plays.
Default Drum/Keygroup Filter: This determines the default type of filter that drum and keygroup programs will use.
See Appendix > Glossary > Filter to learn about this.
Default Plugin Synth: This determines the default instrument plugin that a new plugin program will use. Use the
window that appears to select it. See Plugins > Selecting Plugins to learn about this.
94
Project Load/Save
The settings on this screen determine if (and how) projects are automatically saved.
Auto Load File: Click the … button to select a project (.xpj) or program (.xpm) on your hard disk to load
automatically anytime the software opens.
Tip: To “bypass” or ignore the auto load file, press and hold Shift while opening the MPC software. This will
open an empty project instead of your selected Auto Load file.
Enabled: When enabled, the MPC software will automatically save your current project after each Timeout interval.
When disabled, the MPC software will not automatically save your project; you must save your project manually.
Timeout: Use this field to select how often your project will automatically save.
Template File: Click the … button to select a project to load when you create a new project from a template. To do
this, click the menu icon (≡) in the upper-left corner of the window, select File, and then click New From Template.
Drag & Drop
This tab shows settings that determine how a sequence is exported when you use the Export Audio drag-and-drop
function or Export MIDI drag-and-drop function in the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. See Editors to learn
about this feature.
Include Program Volume/Pan Settings: When enabled, the exported audio or MIDI file will include its volume
and pan settings. When disabled, the volume and pan settings will be set to 0 dB and center (C), respectively.
Bypass Program Effects Plugins: When enabled, the exported audio or MIDI file will include any third-party
effect plugins that are used with it, but those effects will be bypassed (deactivated). When disabled, those effects
will be activated.
Audio Tail Length: This determines the length of an audio tail (silence) that will be applied to the exported audio
file. When set to 0, the audio file will not have any additional audio tail.
Audio Export: This determines what part of the sequence is exported when you click the Export Audio icon.
Track: When this is selected, Export Audio will export the currently shown track in the current sequence.
Program: When this is selected, Export Audio will export all tracks in that sequence that use the currently
shown program.
Master: When this is selected, Export Audio will export all tracks in that sequence that use programs routed
to master outputs.
MIDI Export: This determines what part of the sequence is exported when you click the Export MIDI icon.
Track: When this is selected, Export MIDI will export the currently shown track in the current sequence.
Sequence: When this is selected, Export MIDI will export all tracks in the current sequence.
Bit Depth: This determines bit depth of the audio file that is exported when you click the Export Audio icon: 16-bit
or 24-bit.
General
The settings on this screen determine how other features work in the hardware and operating system.
Tap Tempo: This determines how many times you have to press the Tap Tempo button before the new tempo is
recognized.
Flash Tap Tempo Light: When enabled, the Tap Tempo button’s light will flash in time with the tempo. When
disabled, the Tap Tempo button’s light will be off.
Filter ‘All Notes Off’ CC: When enabled, “All Notes Off” (“MIDI panic”) messages will be ignored. This is useful if
you are using an external MIDI device that can send these types of messages but you want to filter them out.
When disabled, “All Notes Off” messages will be received normally.
Program Change: This determines what an incoming MIDI program change message will change: a Program,
Sequence, or Track.
Sampling Bit Depth: This determines bit depth of the audio recorded from a sample.
95
Vintage Mode: This determines the type of emulation applied to the audio output. You can apply the particular
sonic qualities of, for example, the MPC3000 or MPC60, or of course no emulation (None).
Audition Auto Play: This determines how long a sample will sound when auto-previewing it.
Audition Outputs: This determines which pair of outputs will play any auditioned sounds: Out 1,2–31,32. These
sounds include: samples, programs, and projects in the Browser; sample playback, Cue Preview, and Slice
Preview in Sample Edit Mode; and sample playback in the Keep or Discard Sample window in the Sampler.
Cue Preview: This determines if/how audio is played as you move the cue playhead. As you move the cue
playhead through a sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the cue playhead
(Before), play the small part of the sample after the cue playhead (After), or not play at all (Off).
Slice Preview: This determines if/how audio is played as you move a slice marker. As you move the slice marker
through a sample waveform, you can set it to play the small part of the sample before the slice marker (Before),
play the small part of the sample after the slice marker (After), or not play at all (Off). You can also configure this
setting in the Wave Editor (see Editors > Wave Editor).
Audio Warp Algorithm: This determines how a sample is “warped” when you adjust the length of a sample
without changing its pitch (e.g., the Warp function in Audio Edit Mode for audio tracks or in Program Edit Mode
for clip programs).
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function. You can reduce the CPU resources required
by using a Warp algorithm other than Elastique Pro, which is very CPU-intensive.
Audio Tracks Auto Warp: This determines how recorded audio track regions are warped. When set to On, any
audio track region that you record will be warped automatically to match the current sequence tempo. You can
then adjust the sequence tempo while the audio track region remains in time.
Note: When you record an audio file, the current sequence tempo will be embedded with it. This information is
stored within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track region, the warping
algorithm uses this sequence tempo and the current value in the BPM field to generate the “stretch factor.”
BPM Detection Range: This defines the range of detectable BPM values when you use any automatic BPM
detection function in the software or when you press the Tap Tempo button to enter a new tempo.
Bank Button Press: This determines how the Pad Bank buttons work.
Select A-D: Pressing a Pad Bank button once will select the corresponding bank from Pad Banks A–D.
Pressing and holding Shift while pressing a Pad Bank button will select the corresponding bank from Pad
Banks E–H.
Select/toggle bank: Pressing a Pad Bank button will alternate between the corresponding bank from Pad
Bank A–D and Pad Bank E–H. In other words, you do not need to hold Shift to select one of Pad Banks E–H.
Allow Multiple Plugin Windows: This determines whether multiple plugin windows can be displayed at the
same time (a feature added to MPC 2.1) or only one plugin window can be displayed at a time (how plugin
windows worked prior to MPC 2.1).
Desktop Screensaver Disable: This determines if/when your computer’s screensaver is disabled while using
the MPC software (using your MPC hardware in Controller Mode):
Never: Your computer’s screensaver will function normally.
When hardware used: As long as your MPC hardware is connected to your computer and being used, your
computer’s screensaver will be disabled.
When hardware attached: As long as your MPC hardware is connected to your computer and powered on,
your computer’s screensaver will be disabled. It will function normally again if you power off or disconnect
your MPC hardware from your computer.
Always: Your computer’s screensaver will be disabled as long as the MPC software is open (whether or not
your MPC hardware is connected or powered on).
Q-Link Playhead Increment: This determines whether turning Q-Link Knob 2 (Playhead) in Main Mode will move
the playhead location by 1/16th-note increments (1/16 Note) or according to the time division (TC Division).
Collect Usage Statistics: This determines whether or not your usage statistics will be sent occasionally to us,
enabling us to improve the MPC experience.
Threads: This determines how many cores of your computer’s processor will be used to render audio. The
available range depends on your processor.
96
Time Correct
The Time Correct window contains various settings to help quantize
events in your sequence. You can quantize note events on MIDI
tracks or track regions on audio tracks (though you cannot apply all
types of quantization to audio tracks).
To open the Time Correct settings, click the menu icon (≡),
select Edit, and click Time Correct.
To apply the settings you selected, click Do It.
To cancel and return to the previous screen, click Close.
Use the Type selector to set how timing corrections are applied.
Start: The start points of note events or audio track regions will be extended or shortened to align with the
closest time division marker in the grid. The end points will remain untouched. You can apply this to MIDI tracks
or audio tracks.
End: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to align with the closest time division marker in
the grid. The start points will remain untouched. You can apply this to MIDI tracks only.
Length: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened so that each event’s length is a multiple of
the time division, regardless of where it is in the grid. The start points will remain untouched. You can apply this
to MIDI tracks only.
Legato: The end points of note events will be extended or shortened to create a long, unbroken phrase from the
first note event’s start point to the last note event’s end point. Each note event will sustain until another note event
starts. If multiple note events start at the same time (and are not the last note events), their lengths will become
identical. Selecting Legato disables all other options in this window. You can apply this to MIDI tracks only.
Without legato applied.
With legato applied.
Use the Time Division selector to set the quantization value. Events will “snap” to these time divisions on the grid.
The T indicates a triplet-based value.
Alternatively, click the TC field at the top of the window and select a time division.
Use the Swing field to set the amount of swing from 50% to 75%. Swing lets you “shuffle” your beats—from subtle
to extreme.
Use the Shift Timing field to shift all events by clock ticks.
Use the Window field to set how many events around a quantize value will be quantized. Any events outside this
range will not be quantized; events inside will.
97
Use the Strength field to set how strictly events will be quantized (i.e., shifted toward the quantize value). Lower
values move events a little bit towards the closest quantize value, resulting in a less mechanical feel than a strict
quantization (a higher value).
Use the Events selector to set the target range for the time correction. You can apply the time correction to All note
events or to just the Selected ones. To select note events to which to apply time correction, either use the various
tools in the editors, or press or click the pad with the desired events (while Hitting Pad Selects All Events is set to
On). You must do this before opening the Time Correct window.
When Range is selected, you can define the locations (From and To) as well as the pads or keys that will be
quantized. When applying time correction to an audio track region, you will not be able to specify pads or keys.
Metronome
The Metronome menu contains all settings regarding the metronome (click track).
To view the metronome settings, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and click Metronome.
Use the Count-In submenu to set if/when the metronome counts before recording.
Off disables the metronome pre-count.
Record enables the pre-count during recording only.
Record + Play enables pre-count in both Record and Playback Modes.
Use the Enable submenu to set if/when the metronome is enabled.
Off disables the metronome.
Play enables the metronome sound during playback only.
Record enables the metronome sound during recording only.
Record + Play enables the metronome to happen in both Record and Playback Modes.
Use the Rate submenu to select the metronome click’s time division: 1/4, 1/4T, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/16, 1/16T, 1/32 or 1/32T.
T indicates a triplet-based time division.
Use the Sound submenu to select the sound that you want to hear for the metronome: Sidestick 1, Sidestick 2,
Clap, Metroclick, Shake, Tambourine, or MPC Click.
Use the Output menu to set where the metronome signal will be heard: a pair of master outputs (Out 1,2–31,32) or a
single master output (Out 1–32).
Use the Metro meter at the top of the window to set the volume of your metronome click.
Click the metronome icon at the top of the window to enable or disable the metronome.
98
Editing Processes
You can use the processes described in this chapter to edit an Audio Region, Sequence, Track, or Program.
Audio Region
You can use any of these functions on the currently selected region of an audio track. These functions are available
in the menu (Edit > Audio Region) only if the Audio tab is selected in the Inspector and if an audio region is selected
in the Grid Editor. To learn about using many of these functions in Grid Editor, see Views > Grid Editor > Audio.
•
The Duplicate function copies and pastes the track region immediately after the original one.
To duplicate the track region, select it, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Audio Region, and click
Duplicate.
•
The Mute function silences the track region.
To mute the track region, select it, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Audio Region, and click Mute.
•
The Reverse function reverses the track region.
To reverse the track region, select it, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Audio Region, and click Reverse.
•
The Warp function lengthens or shortens the track region without changing its pitch.
To warp the track region, select it, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Audio Region, and click Warp.
Use the BPM field above the Grid Editor to change the tempo, which will change the length of the track
region accordingly.
Use the Semi and Fine fields above the Grid Editor to change the pitch (this is useful for matching the
durations of two samples with different pitches).
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function.
You can also do the following while editing an audio track:
•
The Clear Regions function erases all regions from the audio track without erasing the track itself.
To clear all track regions, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Clear Regions. Click OK
to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen. Alternatively, right-click the Track field in the
Inspector and click Clear Regions.
•
The Reset Channel Strip function:
o
clears all Insert effect slots;
o
turns Mute, Solo, automation, and Monitor off;
o
resets the pan knob to the center;
o
resets the level slider to 0.00 dB; and
o
turns the Record Arm () button off.
It does not change the track’s inputs or outputs.
To reset the channel strip, right-click the Track field in the Inspector and click Reset Channel Strip. Click
Reset to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
99
•
The Copy Audio Track function copies the contents of one track to another.
To copy the audio track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Copy Audio Track.
Click the Copy Contents of Track field and select a track. This is the track whose events you want to copy.
Click the Over Contents of Track field and select a track. This is the track where the source track will be
copied.
Click OK to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
Sequence
You can use any of these functions on the currently selected sequence.
•
The Clear function erases all events from the sequence and resets all of its settings.
To clear the sequence, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Clear. Click OK to
continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen. Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the
Inspector and click Clear. Click OK to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Half Length function will immediately halve the length of the sequence (without deleting any note events).
To halve the sequence length, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Half Length.
Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Half length.
•
The Double Length function will immediately double the sequence and copy all events from the first half to the
second half.
To double the sequence length, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Double
Length. Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Double length.
•
The Insert Blank Bars function adds empty bars to a sequence at a specified point.
To insert blank bars, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Insert Blank Bars.
Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Insert bars.
Use the Sequence field to select the desired sequence.
Use the # of Bars field to set how many bars you will insert.
Use the two Time Sig fields to set the time signature of the inserted bars.
Use the Before Bar field to set where you will insert the bars. The bars will be inserted before this one.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Delete Bars function removes a range of bars from a sequence.
To delete bars, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Delete Bars. Alternatively, rightclick the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Delete bars.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence whose bars you want to delete.
Use the First Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars you want to delete. The bar in each field
and all bars in between them will be deleted.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
100
•
The Copy Bars function copies a range of bars from a sequence and adds them to another at a specified point.
To copy bars, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Copy Bars. Alternatively, rightclick the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Copy bars.
Use the Copy From > Sequence field to select the “source” sequence. This is the sequence whose bars
you want to copy.
Use the First Bar and Last Bar fields to set the range of bars to copy in the source sequence.
Use the Paste To > Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence. This is the sequence where the
source sequence bars will be copied.
Use the After Bar field to set where you want to add the copied bars. The copied bars will be inserted
after this one.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied bars you want to add.
Click Replace to overwrite the destination sequence.
Click Merge to add the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
Click Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Copy Events function copies a range of events or selected audio track regions from a sequence and adds
them to another at a specified point.
To copy events, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Copy Events. Alternatively,
right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Copy events.
Use the Copy From > Sequence field to select the “source” sequence. This is the sequence whose
events you want to copy.
Use the Copy From > Track field to select the “source” track. This is the track whose events you want
to copy.
Use the Copy From > Time fields to set the time range (in bars, beats, and ticks) of the events you want
to copy. The Time fields set the start of the time range, and the To fields set the end of the time range.
Click the Copy All Events/Copy Only Selected Events menu to select either option. Select Copy All
Events to copy and paste all events in the track. Select Copy Only Selected Events to copy and paste
only the events that are currently selected.
Use the Paste To > Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence. This is the sequence where the
source sequence events will be copied.
Use the Paste To > Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track where the source track
events will be copied.
Use the Paste To > Time fields to set where (in bars, beats, and ticks) you want to add the copied
events. The events will be added after this point.
Use the Copies field to set how many instances of the copied events you want to add.
Click Replace to overwrite the destination sequence.
Click Merge to add the events to the destination sequence without erasing anything.
Click Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Copy Sequence function copies the contents of one sequence to another.
To copy a sequence, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Copy Sequence. Alternatively,
right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Copy.
Use the Copy Contents of Sequence field to select the “source” sequence. This is the sequence whose
events you want to copy.
Use the Over Contents of Sequence field to select the “destination” sequence. This is the sequence
where the source sequence will be copied.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
101
•
The Copy Track function copies the contents of one track to another.
To copy the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Copy Track.
Use the Copy Contents of Track field to select the “source” track. This is the track whose events you
want to copy.
Use the Over Contents of Track field to select the “destination” track. This is the track where the
source track will be copied.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Transpose function transposes a range of events on a track in a sequence. The events within that range will
shift accordingly in the Grid Editor.
To transpose the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Transpose.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence you want to transpose.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to transpose within the sequence.
Use the Start and End fields to set the time range (in bars, beats, and ticks) of the sequence you want to
transpose. The Start fields set the start of the time range, and the End fields set the end of the time range.
For drum programs, use the two Pad fields to select the “source” pad (whose events you want to move)
and “destination” pad (where the events will be placed). Tap each field and then press the desired pad.
For keygroup programs, plugin programs, and MIDI programs, set the range and amount of transposition:
Range: Use the two Note fields to set the range of notes of the events you want to transpose. Note
events within this range will be transposed, while note events outside of this range will remain unchanged.
Transpose: Use this field to set how many semitones up or down you want to transpose the note events.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Erase function erases all or part of a track in a specific sequence.
To erase events in the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Erase. Alternatively,
right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Erase.
Use the Sequence field to select the sequence you want to erase.
Use the Track field to select the track you want to erase within the sequence.
Use the Start and End fields to set the time range (in bars, beats, and ticks) of the sequence you want to
erase. The Start fields set the start of the time range, and the End fields set the end of the time range.
Select one of the Erase options to select what types of events you erase:
o
All erases all pad events from the designated time range and reset all of its settings.
o
Automation erases only automation from the designated time range.
o
Note erases only specific pad events from the designated time range. In the diagram of the eight
pad banks that appears, press each pad in each bank to select or deselect its notes.
o
Except Note erases everything except pad events from the designated time range.
Click Do It to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Events Double Speed function immediately halves the lengths of all note events on all tracks in the
sequence as well as the distance between them. In other words, all tracks’ notes are pressed closer together so
the sequence sounds like it is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of
notes or the tempo.
To double the speed of all note events in the sequence, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence,
and click Events Double Speed.
102
•
The Events Half Speed function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events on all tracks in the
sequence as well as the distance between them. In other words, all tracks’ notes are spread further apart so the
sequence sounds like it is playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes
or the tempo.
To halve the speed of all note events in the sequence, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence,
and click Events Half Speed.
•
The Next Sequence and Previous Sequence options select the next or previous sequence in your project
(respectively). If you select one of these during playback, the next or previous sequence will be selected when
the current one is done playing.
To select the next or previous sequence, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Next
Sequence or Previous Sequence (respectively).
•
The Next Sequence Now and Previous Sequence Now options immediately select the next or previous
sequence in your project (respectively).
To select the next or previous sequence immediately, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence,
and click Next Sequence Now or Previous Sequence Now (respectively).
•
Export as MIDI lets you export the current sequence as a standard MIDI (.mid) file.
To export the sequence as a MIDI file, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Export
as MIDI. Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Export as MIDI.
In the Export Curent Sequence as Standard MIDI file window, do any of the following:
To select the storage device you want to view, click the down arrow () next to the file path. If
you have storage devices connected to your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as well.
To enter a folder, double-click it or press Enter.
To create a new folder, click New Folder, type a name for the new folder, and then click OK or
press Enter to confirm the name, or click Cancel or press Esc to keep the original name. You will
immediately enter the new folder.
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow ().
To name the file, click the File field at the bottom of the window, and type a name.
To save the file, click Save or press Enter.
To cancel, click Cancel or press Esc.
•
The Bounce to Sample function immediately renders the sequence (all of its tracks) as an audio sample and
places it in the project’s sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the sequence
name. If you have already used this function on this sequence, then it will create another audio sample appended
with the next-highest number.
To bounce the sequence to a sample, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click Bounce
to Sample. Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Bounce to sample. You
can also press Shift+Alt+S (Windows) or Shift+Option+S (macOS).
•
The Bounce to New Audio Track function immediately renders the sequence (all of its tracks) as an audio track
in the project. The Audio tab will be automatically selected. By default, the sample will be named Bounce - and
appended with a number. This function does not work for tracks that use MIDI programs or CV programs.
To bounce the sequence to an audio track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Sequence, and click
Bounce to New Audio Track. Alternatively, right-click the Sequence field in the Inspector and click Bounce
to new audio track. You can also press Alt+S (Windows) or Option+S (macOS).
103
Track
You can use any of these functions on the currently selected track.
•
The Select All function selects all events or audio track regions in the current sequence and track.
To select all events or audio track regions in the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and
click Select All.
•
The Deselect function deselects all events or audio track regions in the current sequence and track.
To deselect all events or audio track regions in the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track,
and click Deselect.
•
The Delete function erases the entire audio track. This cannot be used on MIDI tracks.
To delete the track, select the Audio tab, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Delete.
Click OK to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen. Alternatively, right-click the Track field in
the Inspector and click Delete Audio Track.
•
The Clear function erases all note events from the current track.
To clear the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Clear. Alternatively, right-click the
Track field in the Inspector and click Clear. Click Clear to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
•
The Explode function immediately splits the current MIDI track into multiple MIDI tracks—one for each distinct
pad or note (pitch, not event). The current track also remains present and intact, while each track created from it
is labeled with the track name and pad name or number. This cannot be used on audio tracks.
To explode the track, select the MIDI tab, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Explode.
•
The Events Double Speed function immediately halves the lengths of all note events on the track as well as the
distance between them. In other words, the track’s notes are pressed closer together so the track sounds like it
is playing at twice the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
To double the speed of all note events in the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click
Events Double Speed.
•
The Events Half Speed function immediately doubles the lengths of all note events on the track as well as the
distance between them. In other words, the track’s notes are spread further apart so the track sounds like it is
playing at half of the previous speed. This does not actually affect the pitches of notes or the tempo.
To halve the speed of all note events in the track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click
Events Double Speed.
•
The Next Track and Previous Track options select the next or previous track in your sequence (respectively).
To select the next or previous track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Next Track or
Previous Track (respectively).
•
Export as MIDI lets you export the current track as a standard MIDI (.mid) file.
To export the track as a MIDI file, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Export as MIDI.
Alternatively, right-click the Track field in the Inspector and click Export as MIDI.
In the Export Curent Track as Standard MIDI file window, do any of the following:
To select the storage device you want to view, click the down arrow () next to the file path. If
you have storage devices connected to your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as well.
To enter a folder, double-click it or press Enter.
To create a new folder, click New Folder, type a name for the new folder, and then click OK or
press Enter to confirm the name, or click Cancel or press Esc to keep the original name. You will
immediately enter the new folder.
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow ().
To name the file, click the File field at the bottom of the window, and type a name.
To save the file, click Save or press Enter.
To cancel, click Cancel or press Esc.
104
•
The Bounce to Sample function immediately renders the track as an audio sample and places it in the project’s
sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and appended with the sequence name. If you have already used
this function on this sequence, then it will create another audio sample appended with the next-highest number.
To bounce the track to a sample, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click Bounce to
Sample. Alternatively, right-click the Track field in the Inspector and click Bounce to sample.
•
The Bounce to New Audio Track function immediately renders the track (for the current sequence only) as an
audio track in the project. The Main Mode will automatically switch to the Audio tab, and the original track will be
muted. By default, it will be named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002). This function does not
work for tracks that use MIDI programs or CV programs.
To bounce the MIDI track to an audio track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Track, and click
Bounce to New Audio Track. Alternatively, right-click the Track field in the Inspector and click Bounce to
new audio track.
Program
You can use any of these functions on the currently selected program. These functions are shown in the menu (Edit
> Program) only if the MIDI tab is selected in the Inspector.
•
The Duplicate function immediately creates an identical program. The duplicate program will use the same name
but appended with a number (e.g., Program 002).
To duplicate the program, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Duplicate.
Alternatively, right-click a program in the Project panel and click Duplicate.
•
The Duplicate to Track function immediately creates an identical program on a new track. The duplicate
program will use the same name but appended with a number (e.g., Program 002). The new track will be named
Track and appended with a number (e.g., Track 06).
To duplicate the program to a new track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click
Duplicate to Track. Alternatively, right-click a program in the Project panel and click Duplicate to Track.
•
The Merge function lets you copy the pads (and their parameters) from one program into another, essentially
consolidating two programs into one. The name of the new program will be the names of the original two
programs separated by and.
To merge two programs, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Merge. Alternatively,
right-click a program in the Project panel and click Merge.
Use the Pads from program menu to select the program you want to copy.
Use the into program menu to select the program to which the copied pads will be added.
Select the Start on next bank box if you want the copied pads to start on Pad 01 of the next available bank.
Deselect this box if you want the copied pads to start on the next available pad, regardless of the bank.
Click OK to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
105
•
The Delete function erases the program from the project. The samples used in that program will remain in the
project’s sample pool and any other programs that use them.
To delete the program, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Delete. Alternatively,
right-click the Program field in the Inspector and click Delete. You can also right-click a program in the
Project panel and click Delete.
•
The Rename function lets you enter a new name for the program. Type a name and click OK to continue or
Cancel to return to the previous screen.
To rename the program, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Rename. Alternatively,
right-click a program in the Project panel and click Rename.
•
The Bounce to Sample function immediately renders all tracks that use that program (for the current sequence
only) as an audio sample and places it in the project’s sample pool. By default, it will be named Bounce - and
appended with the program name. This function does not work for MIDI programs or CV programs.
To bounce the program to a sample, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Bounce to
Sample. Alternatively, right-click the Program field in the Inspector and click Bounce to sample.
•
The Bounce to New Audio Track function immediately renders that program (for the current sequence only) as
an audio track in the project. The Main Mode will automatically switch to the Audio tab, and the original program
will be muted. By default, it will be named Audio and appended with a number (e.g., Audio 002). This function
does not work for MIDI programs or CV programs.
To bounce the program to an audio track, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click
Bounce to Audio Track. Alternatively, right-click the Program field in the Inspector and click Bounce to
new audio track.
•
The Pad Color option opens the Pad Color window where you can assign specific colors to your pads in each
program. See the Pad Color chapter to learn how to use this.
To open the Pad Color window, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Pad Color.
•
The Note Mapping option opens the Note Mapping window where you can where you can assign a MIDI note
to each pad in a program. See the Note Mapping chapter to learn how to use this.
To open the Note Mapping window, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Note Mapping.
•
The Flatten Pad option opens the Flatten Pad window where you can select a pad whose layered samples will
be consolidated into a single audio sample on just its first layer. This function renders all samples on a pad as an
audio sample and places it on the first layer of that pad. The resulting sample is the audio signal produced by
that pad at full velocity (127) after the pad channel strip, which means that it includes any assigned pad insert
effects and the results of warping the sample. This function is useful if you need to reduce how CPU-intensive a
pad or program is by essentially “embedding” the warping and effects in the sample itself. By default, it will use
the name of the first sample. This function works for drum programs only. (This is the same as the Flatten Pad
button shown at the top of the touchscreen in Program Edit Mode.)
To flatten the samples of a pad, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit > Program, and click Flatten Pad.
Use the Pad menu to select the pad whose samples you want to flatten. Alternatively, press the desired pad.
Use the Name field to enter a name for the flattened sample.
Use the Tail Length field to set the length of the audio tail. This will add extra seconds to the end of the
resulting audio file. This is useful if you are using effects or samples whose sounds exceed the defined
audio length (e.g., long reverb or delay, one-shot samples with long decays, etc.). We recommend using
an audio tail of at least a couple of seconds.
Click Do it to continue or Cancel to return to the previous screen.
106
Effects
You can apply various effects to the pads, keygroups, audio tracks, programs, submixes, and master outputs, using
insert and send/return effects. This chapter can help you get a good overall understanding of how the effects work.
See Appendix > Effects & Parameters for a list of all available effects (with a brief description of each) and their
editable parameters.
Overview
In a program, each pad or keygroup can have up to four insert effects applied to it. An entire program can have up
to four insert effects applied to it, as well.
An audio track, like a program, can have up to four insert effects applied to it, as well.
For even further flexibility, each submix can have up to four insert effects applied to it. You can route pads,
keygroups, audio tracks, or programs to a submix, which is then routed to a master output.
Additionally, each pad, keygroup, audio track, program, and submix can be sent to (up to) four return channels
(returns), each of which can have up to four insert effects of their own. Their audio will be routed through the insert
effects on those returns, and the processed audio will be sent to a master output.
Finally, you can apply up to four insert effects to each master output (a stereo pair of channels: Outputs 1/2,
Outputs 3/4, etc.).
When you create an audio mixdown of a sequence or song, you can choose whether or not master insert effects are
included or send/return effects are included, depending on what you are mixing down:
If you are creating an audio mixdown of a pair of master outputs, you can choose whether or not master insert
effects will be included in the mixdown.
If you are creating an audio mixdown of separate programs or exploded tracks, you can choose whether or
not send/return effects will be included in the mixdown.
See Audio Mixdown to learn about these options.
The Sampler and Looper handle effects differently:
The Sampler can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it. This means that the
effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about the Sampler in the Modes > Sampler chapter.
Similarly, the Looper can use up to four insert effects, which are applied to the audio as you record it. This
means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later. Learn more about the Looper in the Modes >
Looper chapter.
Please see the rest of this chapter to learn how to use insert effects as well as send/return effects.
107
You can load, edit, remove, and activate or deactivate effects in the
Inserts section of a channel strip. Each Inserts section has four
insert effect slots.
To load an effect, double-click an empty slot in the Inserts section
of a channel strip. In the window that appears:
Click the + or – button to expand or collapse each category.
The right edge of the window shows how many MIDI channels
can be sent to and from each effect.
Select Sort by type to sort the effects by type.
Select Sort by manufacturer to sort the effects by manufacturer.
Double-click an effect or click it and then click Select to load it.
Click the gear icon to open the Plugin Manager. See Plugins >
Plugin Manager to learn about this.
Click Close or press Esc to close the window without loading
any effect.
To remove a loaded effect, double-click the down arrow () next
to its name the Inserts section. In the window that appears, doubleclick the <none> option at the top of the list of effects or click it
once and then click Select.
To edit an effect, double-click its name in the Inserts section of a
channel strip. A window with the effect’s parameters will appear.
To adjust a parameter, click and drag its knob up or down. To
make finer adjustments, press and hold Ctrl (Windows) or 
(macOS) and then click and drag its knob up or down.
To enable or disable the effect, click the On/Off button in the
upper-left corner.
To keep the window on top at all times, click the down arrow
() in the upper-right corner so it becomes an up arrow ().
Click it again to allow the window to be hidden under others.
To close the window, click the X in the upper-right corner.
To activate or deactivate an effect, click the on/off button next to it.
To deactivate all four effects, click the on/off button next to Inserts
so it turns gray (off). Previously active effects will be off even though
the button appears to be on.
To reactivate the previously active effects, click the on/off button
next to Inserts so it turns blue (on).
To move an effect from one slot to another, click and drag it from its
original slot to another slot (the new slot will be outlined in yellow
before you release it). The effect will retain all of its editable parameters.
To copy an effect from one slot to another, press and hold Alt
(Windows) or Option (macOS) and then click and drag it from its
original slot to another slot (the new slot will be yellow before you
release it). The effect will retain all of its editable parameters.
108
Insert Effects
Insert effects can be applied to a pad, keygroup, audio track, program, submix or master output. The audio
signal produced by that source is processed by any insert effect/effects that are loaded to that source (in the Inserts
section of its channel strip) and activated. Each one can have up to four insert effects loaded and activated.
Below is an outline of where you can set the effects for a pad, keygroup, audio track, program, submix, or master output.
Note:
If the Inserts section is not shown in a channel strip in the Inspector, click the menu icon (≡), go to View >
Inspector, and click Inserts.
If the Inserts section is not shown in a channel strip in the Pad Mixer or Channel Mixer, click the box icon.
Pad: You can load up to four insert effects to each pad. The Inserts section for a pad is available in two places:
•
the pad channel strip in the Inspector (in any mode)
•
the pad channel strip in the Pad Mixer
Tip: When using pad insert effects, they will be applied to the selected pad only. This means that you could apply
unique combinations of effects to each pad within a program. If you want to apply the same effect to all pads, do this
with a program insert effect.
Keygroup: You can load up to four insert effects to each keygroup. The Inserts section for a keygroup is available in
two places:
•
the keygroup channel strip in the Inspector (in any mode)
•
the keygroup channel strip in the Pad Mixer
Important: When using keygroup insert effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if you
load insert effects to multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that range as well.
Audio Track: You can load up to four insert effects to each audio track. The Inserts section for an audio track is
available in three places:
•
the audio track channel strip in the Inspector
•
the audio track channel strip in the Pad Mixer
•
the audio track channel strip in the Channel Mixer
Program: You can load up to four insert effects to each program. The Inserts section for a program is available in
three places:
•
the program channel strip in the Inspector
•
the program channel strip in the Pad Mixer
•
the program channel strip in the Channel Mixer
Submix: You can load up to four insert effects to each submix. The Inserts section for a submix is available only in
the submix channel strip in the Channel Mixer.
Master Output: You can load up to four insert effects to each master output (a stereo pair of channels: Outputs 1/2,
Outputs 3/4, etc.). The Inserts section for a master output is available in two places:
•
the master channel strip in the Inspector
•
the master channel strip in the Channel Mixer
109
Send/Return Effects
Send/return effects work in the following way:
1. A pad, keygroup, audio track, program, or submix can send its audio to a return at a designated send level.
2. That audio is processed by the effects on the return. Each return can have up to four insert effects loaded and
activated.
3. The processed audio is sent to a pair of master outputs (stereo) or a single master output (mono).
There are four available returns. Any pad, keygroup, audio track, program, or submix can send its audio to any
combination of those returns at the same time.
You can load send/return effects and set the return levels in two places:
•
the return channel strip in the Inspector
•
the return channel strip in the Channel Mixer
Below is a description of where to set the desired send levels for a pad, keygroup, audio track, program, or submix.
Note:
If the Send knobs are not shown in a channel strip in the Inspector, click the menu icon (≡), go to View >
Inspector, and click Sends.
If the Send knobs are not shown in a channel strip in the Pad Mixer or Channel Mixer, click the four-circles icon.
Pad: The Send knobs for a pad are available in two places:
•
the pad channel strip in the Inspector (in any mode)
•
the pad channel strip in the Pad Mixer
Keygroup: The Send knobs for a keygroup are available in two places:
•
the keygroup channel strip in the Inspector (in any mode)
•
the keygroup channel strip in the Pad Mixer
Important: When using keygroup send/return effects, they will be applied to that keygroup only. Keep this in mind if
you use send/return effects with multiple keygroups with overlapping note ranges—the effects will overlap in that
range as well.
Audio Track: The Send knobs for an audio track are available in three places:
•
the audio track channel strip in the Inspector
•
the audio track channel strip in the Pad Mixer
•
the audio track channel strip in the Channel Mixer
Program: The Send knobs for a program are available in three places:
•
the program channel strip in the Inspector
•
the program channel strip in the Pad Mixer
•
the program channel strip in the Channel Mixer
Submix: The Send knobs for a submix are available only in the submix channel strip in the Channel Mixer.
110
Automation
You can set the automation for programs and audio tracks to be “written,” “read,” or disabled entirely. You can do
this globally or for individual programs and audio tracks.
Global
A button in the upper-right corner of the toolbar controls the global automation. When you click this button to
change its state, it will change the automation state for all programs in the project. (If you have changed the
automation state of an individual program or audio track as described below, then this global automation button will
indicate that rather than the global automation state.)
Click this global automation button to cycle through its three states:
When off, automation data will be ignored. If you have already recorded or entered automation, clicking
this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this and turn it off by
pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect and
its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), automation data will be read but not recorded. You can still manually edit and
enter automation. (Think of this as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your
automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), automation can be recorded and will overwrite any existing automation. (Make
sure not to touch Q-Link knobs accidentally while you are recording.)
Programs & Audio Tracks
You can also set the automation for each program or audio track by using the program/audio track automation
button in the channel strip for that program or audio track (shown in the Inspector, Pad Mixer, and Channel Mixer).
Automation is available for all program types.
Note: Remember that clicking the global automation button will change the automation state for all programs in the
project; if they were originally different, all of them will then match the global automation state.
Click this program/audio track automation button to cycle through its three states:
When off, the program will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override this
and turn it off by pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the effect
and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not record any additional
automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter automation. (Think of this as a protective
feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs assigned
to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are recording.)
111
Recording Automation
Automating various parameters is a good way to add some motion and dynamism to your sequences.
You can automate three types of parameters for MIDI tracks:
•
•
•
Track Parameters:
o
the mixer parameters of the track (Volume, Pan, Mute, and Solo)
o
the MIDI CCs of the track (0–127)
o
aftertouch messages
o
pitch bend messages
o
channel pressure messages
o
program change messages
Program Parameters (not available for MIDI programs):
o
the mixer parameters of the program (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, and Send 1–4)
o
parameters of the program (options vary based on the type of program)
o
parameters for insert effects on the program (options vary based on the effect)
Pad Parameters (for drum programs, keygroup programs, and clip programs):
o
the mixer parameters of the pad/keygroup (Level, Pan, Pad Mute, Pad Solo, or Send 1–4)
o
parameters of the pad/keygroup (options vary based on the type of program)
o
parameters for insert effects on the pad/keygroup (options vary based on the effect)
You can automate only one set of parameters for audio tracks:
•
Audio Track Parameters:
o
the mixer parameters of the audio track (Volume, Pan, Mute, Solo, and Send 1–4)
o
parameters for insert effects on the audio track (options vary based on the effect)
To enter automation for track parameters on a MIDI track:
1. Select the track, and then click Rec () or Overdub (⊕) to record-arm it.
2. Click Play () or Play Start (|) to start playback of the sequence.
3. Use whatever controls you want to adjust the parameter/parameters as the sequence plays. Your changes will
be recorded in real time. Note that recording automation is not an overdub-style process (even if you clicked
Overdub to record-arm the track); when the sequence repeats, it will overwrite/replace any automation that was
previously recorded.
4. Click Stop () to stop the automation recording.
Alternatively, create the automation curves manually (see Editing Automation to learn how to do this).
To record automation of a program parameter or pad parameter:
1. Set the program/audio track automation button to the red Write (W) option for any program or audio track
whose parameters (or pad parameters) you want to automate. Alternatively, click the global automation button
in the upper-right corner of the window to change the state of all programs and audio tracks.
2. Click Play () or Play Start (|) to start playback of the sequence.
3. Use whatever controls you want to adjust the parameter/parameters as the sequence plays. Your changes will
be recorded in real time. Note that recording automation is not an overdub-style process; when the sequence
repeats, it will overwrite/replace any automation that was previously recorded.
4. Click Stop () to stop the automation recording.
Once you are done, we recommend setting the program/audio track automation button for that program or audio
track to the green Read (R) option. This ensures your track uses the automation you just recorded when you play it
back (and will not be overwritten by any future adjustments you make to parameters during sequence playback).
112
Editing Automation
You can use automation editing tools to adjust or create automation curves for all available parameters.
To edit automation of a program parameter or pad parameter, use the automation lane in the Grid Editor:
1. In the Grid Editor, make sure the automation lane is shown. If it is not, click the up arrow (^) in the lower-left
corner of the Grid Editor.
2. Click the down arrow () in the lower-left corner of the Grid Editor. Use the menu and submenus that appear to
select the desired parameter. The parameter name will then appear below Modifier.
3. Use the pencil and marquee tools described below to create and edit automation for this parameter in the
automation lane.
Use these tools in the Grid Editor to create or edit the automation curve in the automation lane. See Editors > Grid
Editor to learn more about using the Grid Editor in general.
Important: An automation curve consists of several points placed according to current time division—aligned with
the quantization grid). You can create or move points without restricting them to the time division by pressing and
holding Shift.
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To create a point, click the desired location in the automation lane.
To select a point, click it.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the automation lane. Press and hold Shift while
doing this to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To erase a point, double-click it.
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a point, click it.
To select multiple points, click and drag across the automation lane to create a box around them.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the automation lane. Press and hold Shift while
doing this to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To move multiple points, select them as described above, and then click and drag them to another
location in the automation lane. Press and hold Shift while doing this to move them without restricting
(“snapping”) them to the quantization grid.
113
To edit automation of a track parameter for a MIDI track, use the automation lane in the Grid Editor, as described
above. Alternatively, use the Track View in Track View Mode, the Channel Mixer, or Track Mute Mode.
To edit automation of a track parameter in the Track View:
1. In the Track View, make sure the tracks you want are shown. If they are not, click menu icon (≡) in the upperright corner, and select or deselect Show Unused Tracks, Show Programs, Show Audio Tracks, and Show
Midi Tracks.
2. Click the A icon in the upper-left corner so it is white. The menu next to will be enabled, and Automation and its
editing tools will appear above the middle of the Track View.
3. Click the menu next to the A icon to select the desired parameter.
4. Use the pencil and marquee tools described below to create and edit the automation curve for this parameter in
the track strip or program strip.
MIDI track, audio track, and program strips appear slightly differently while displaying their automation curves:
MIDI track:
Audio track:
Program:
Use these tools in the Track View Editor to create or edit the automation curve. See Track View to learn more about
using the Track View in general.
Important: An automation curve consists of several points placed according to current time division—aligned with
the quantization grid). You can create or move points without restricting them to the time division by pressing and
holding Shift.
Pencil: Draw Mode:
To create a point, click the desired location in the track strip or program strip.
To select a point, click it.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the track strip or program strip.
To erase a point, double-click it.
Marquee: Marquee Mode:
To select a point, click it.
To select points, click and drag across the track strip or program strip to create a box around them.
To move a point, click and drag it to another location in the track strip or program strip. Press and
hold Shift while doing this to move it without restricting (“snapping”) it to the quantization grid.
To move multiple points, select them as described above, and then click and drag them to another
location in the track strip or program strip. Press and hold Shift while doing this to move them
without restricting (“snapping”) them to the quantization grid.
114
16 Level
When 16 Level is first activated, the selected pad (Pad A01 by default) will be
temporarily copied to all 16 pads. The pads will now output the same note
number as the initial pad, but a selectable parameter will be fixed at values
that increase as the pad numbers increase (e.g., Pad 1 is the minimum, Pad
16 is the maximum), regardless of how hard you press them.
To show the 16 Level window, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and
click 16 Level. Alternatively, click the 16 Level button above the Pads section
in Main Mode or Program Edit Mode.
To select a pad, do one of the following:
•
Press and hold 16 Level, and then press the desired pad.
•
Click the 16 Levels box to deselect it (temporarily disabling the feature), press the desired pad, and then
click the 16 Levels box again to select it.
•
Click the Pad field, and use the data dial or –/+ buttons.
•
Double-click the Pad field, and click the desired pad in the list that appears.
In the 16 Levels window, click the Type menu to choose the parameter: Velocity, Tune, Filter, Layer, Attack, or Decay.
If the Type is set to Tune, click the Original pad menu and select the pad that will contain the note at its original
pitch (tuning).
Note Mapping
Note Mapping lets you assign specific MIDI notes to your
pads in each program except for keygroup programs.
To show the Note Mapping window, click the menu icon
(≡), select Edit > Program, and click Note Mapping.
Important: If the Note Mapping window is already open
and you want to assign pad colors for another program,
click Close, select a track that uses the desired program,
and then open the Note Mapping window again.
The Pad column indicates the pad bank and number of
each pad in the program.
The Note Name column indicates the note value (e.g.,
G#3, A 4, etc.).
The MIDI Note column indicates the MIDI note number
(corresponding to the note value).
Click Edit next to each pad to open a submenu listing the
available octaves. Select an octave and then select the
note you want to assign to the pad.
Click Classic MPC to assign a preconfigured note mapping to the pads that was used on early MPCs.
Click Chromatic to assign all notes to all pads chromatically in an ascending order (i.e. C-2/MIDI Note 0, assigned
to Pad A01, through G 8/MIDI Note 127, assigned to Pad H16).
Click Close to close this window and use the current note mapping.
115
Pad Color
Pad Color lets you assign specific colors to your pads in
each program.
To show the Pad Color window, click the menu icon (≡),
select Edit > Program, and click Pad Color.
Important: If the Pad Color window is already open and
you want to assign pad colors for another program, click
Close, select a track that uses the desired program, and
then open the Pad Color window again.
Use the Display As field to set how the pad lights will display:
Off: The pads will be unlit whether you are playing them or not.
Classic Velocity: The pads will be unlit while you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light with
colors according to the velocity: red indicates a high velocity, yellow indicates a low velocity.
Fixed: The pads will be lit with their assigned colors whether you are playing them or not.
Off->Velocity: The pads will be unlit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light with
their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
Dim->Velocity: The pads will be dimly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will light
with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
Bright->Velocity: The pads will be brightly lit when you are not playing them. When you press them, they will
light with their assigned color with a brightness that corresponds with the velocity.
Use the Pads field to determine whether you are setting the color for one pad (Edit single pads) or all pads (Edit all pads).
Tip: To quickly assign that color to all pads in the program, press and hold Shift while clicking a color button.
Use the Empty pads menu to set how empty pads will display:
Empty pads off: Pads without any sounds will remain off.
Empty pads dim: Pads without any sounds will remain more dimly lit than pads with sounds assigned.
Empty pads normal: Pads without any sounds will appear the same as pads with sounds assigned.
Click a pad to select it, and then click one of the color buttons to assign its color.
Tip: To select the color button corresponding a specific pad’s color, press and hold Shift, and then press the
pad or click it on the window.
To make the current pad color settings the defaults for all programs on the same type (e.g., drum programs,
keygroup programs, etc.), click Make Default.
Click Close to close the window.
116
Audio Mixdown
The Audio Mixdown window lets you render and export either the current
sequence or song as an audio file. In Song Mode, this will export the
entire song. In any other mode, this will export the current sequence only.
To open the Audio Mixdown window, click the menu icon (≡), and go
to File > Export and click As Audio Mixdown.
Audio Length
Use the Start Bar and End Bar fields to define where the resulting
audio file will start and end, respectively.
Use the Audio Tail field to add extra seconds to the end of the resulting
audio file. This is useful if you are using effects or samples whose
sounds exceed the defined audio length (e.g., long reverb or delay, oneshot samples with long decays, etc.). We recommend using an audio
tail of at least a couple of seconds.
Render Source
Select Stereo Output and use the adjacent field to select a pair of outputs: Out 1,2–31,32. The mixdown will be
taken from these outputs.
Select Separate Programs to create a mixdown of each program used in the sequence or song.
Select Explode Tracks to create a mixdown of each track used in the sequence (you cannot use this option for
an entire song).
Important: Each pad or keygroup must have their output routed to Program to be included in the mixdown. This
is the typical (and default) setting.
Render Options
If your Render Source is set to Stereo Output, select Master Inserts to include master insert effects in the mixdown.
If your Render Source is set to Separate Programs or Explode Tracks, select Export Returns to include
return buses in the mixdown.
If your Render Source is set to Stereo Output, click Save as Project Preview to save the sequence or song as
a project preview file (which you can play for reference in the Browser). If you select this box, Stereo Output will
automatically be selected, as well.
File Formats
Click WAV, AIFF, or MP3 to select the file format of the mixdown.
For WAV and AIFF files, use the Bit Depth field to select a bit
depth of 8, 16, or 24 bits, or 32 bits, floating point (32 F). For MP3
files, you can select a Bitrate of 128, 160, 192, or 320 kbps.
Use the Sample Rate field to select a sample rate of 44.1 kHz, 48
kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz. In most cases, we recommend selecting
44.1 kHz.
Click Export to enter the Save screen where you can select a name
and location to save your audio mixdown.
Click Cancel to return to the previous screen.
117
Plugins
The MPC software enables you to scan third-party plugins (VST or AU formats) to use within your projects.
Instrument plugins can be used with plugin programs. See Programs > Plugin Programs to learn about this.
Effect plugins can be used as insert effects on pads, keygroups, audio tracks, most types of programs, submixes,
returns, and master outputs. See Effects > Insert Effects to learn about this.
See the following Scanning Plugins section to learn how to scan your computer and external storage devices for the
plugins you want to use.
See the Plugin Manager section to learn how to manage all of your scanned plugins.
See the Selecting Plugins section to learn how to select a plugin when using plugin programs or insert effects.
Scanning Plugins
In order to use plugins in the MPC software, the software
must scan any folders on your computer or external
storage device where they are located.
To scan your plugins:
1. Windows: Click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and
click Preferences.
macOS: Click the MPC menu and click Preferences.
2. In the Preferences window that appears, click the
Plugins tab.
3. Click the … button next to one of the VST Folders
fields.
4. In the window that appears, select the location where
your plugins are stored. Select the folder and click
Open (while not actually in the folder).
5. The file path will appear in the VST Folders field.
Click the box next to it so it is selected.
If you have plugins stored in other locations, you can
repeat Steps 3–5 to select those locations.
6. Click Scan New to scan these recently selected
locations. This is helpful if you have already scanned
other locations and want to scan just the one/ones
you recently added.
Alternatively, click Rescan All to scan all four
locations again.
The list of scanned plugins will appear in the list
below. When the scan is completed, the status bar
above it will show Done.
7. Click OK to close the window.
118
Plugin Manager
The Plugin Manager lets you view and manage the status of all plugins in your MPC software.
To open the Plugin Manager, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and click Plugin Manager. The Plugins window
will appear. Alternatively, click the gear icon in the lower-left corner of the window that appears when selecting a
plugin or an insert effect.
Use these boxes and the Search field to filter the plugins shown in the list below.
Instruments: Select this box to show instrument plugins.
FX: Select this box to show effect plugins.
Good: Select this box to show plugins that were successfully scanned.
Bad: Select this box to show plugins that failed to scan.
Search: Use this field to enter a search term. The results will appear in the list below.
The columns (described below, left to right) indicate the plugins’ status. Click a column to sort the list by that category.
Right-click the top of a column to auto-size this column, auto-size all columns, or to show or hide specific columns.
Note: The MPC software supports VST or AU plugins.
Use: Select this box to allow the MPC software access to this plugin. If this box is deselected, it will not appear if
you select an instrument plugin (to use for a plugin program) or an effect plugin (to use on an insert effect slot).
Name: This is the plugin’s name.
Manufacturer: This is the plugin’s manufacturer.
Version: This is the version of the plugin.
Type: This is the type of plugin. A waveform and fx indicate an effect plugin. A guitar indicates an instrument plugin.
Path: This is where the plugin is located on your computer or external storage device.
119
Channels: This is how many MIDI channels can be sent to and from the plugin.
OK: This indicates whether the plugin has been successfully scanned or not. OK indicates that the plugin is
properly scanned and can be used in the MPC software. Failed indicates that the plugin was not properly scanned.
To rescan the plugin, click it and then click Rescan in the lower-right corner.
Fav: This indicates whether the plugin is a “favorite” or not. Favorites will appear in a separate category when
you select an instrument or effect plugin. Click the box to select or deselect it.
Rescan: Click this to prompt the MPC software to rescan the selected plugin.
Close: Click this to close the window. Alternatively, press Esc.
Selecting Plugins
Instrument plugins can be used with plugin programs (see Programs > Plugin Programs to learn how to create a
plugin program).
To select an instrument plugin for a plugin program, select the
track that uses that program, and then click the Plugin field in the
Program section of the Inspector.
In the window that appears:
Click the + or – button to expand or collapse each category.
Favorites are instrument plugins whose Fav box is selected in
the Plugin Manager.
The right edge of the window shows how many MIDI channels
can be sent to and from each plugin.
Select Sort by type to sort the plugins by type.
Select Sort by manufacturer to sort the plugins by manufacturer.
Double-click a plugin or click it and then click Select to load it.
Click the gear icon to open the Plugin Manager. See Plugin
Manager to learn about this.
Click Close or press Esc to close the window without loading
any plugin.
Effect plugins can be used as insert effects on pads, keygroups, audio tracks, most types of programs, submixes,
returns, and master outputs (see Effects > Insert Effects to learn how these work).
To load an effect plugin, double-click an empty slot in the Inserts
section of a channel strip. In the window that appears:
Click the + or – button to expand or collapse each category.
Favorites are effect plugins whose Fav box is selected in the
Plugin Manager.
The right edge of the window shows how many MIDI channels
can be sent to and from each effect.
Select Sort by type to sort the effects by type.
Select Sort by manufacturer to sort the effects by manufacturer.
Double-click an effect or click it and then click Select to load it.
Click the gear icon to open the Plugin Manager. See Plugin
Manager to learn about this.
Click Close or press Esc to close the window without loading
any effect.
120
Expansions
The MPC software enables you to use MPC Expansions, collections of samples, loops, riffs, etc. available in the Akai
Professional Expansion Store.
To open the Expansion Store:
Windows: Click the menu icon (≡), select Help, and select Expansion Store.
macOS: Click the MPC menu and click Expansion Store.
This opens an online store of available MPC Expansions on the Akai Professional website. You must have an internet
connection to use this feature.
See the Expansion Manager chapter to learn how to manage all of your scanned MPC Expansions.
See the Selecting Expansions section to learn how to select an MPC Expansion when using plugin programs.
See the Browser > Expansion Browser chapter to learn how to use the Expansion Browser.
Expansion Manager
The Expansion Manager lets you view and manage the status of all MPC Expansions in your MPC software.
To open the Expansion Manager, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and click Expansion Manager. The
Expansions window will appear.
The columns (described below, left to right) indicate the MPC Expansions’ status. Right-click the top of a column to
auto-size this column or auto-size all columns.
Use: Select this box to allow the MPC software access to this MPC Expansion. If this box is deselected, it will
not appear in the Expansion Browser.
Expansion Details: This shows the MPC Expansion’s name, the manufacturer, and the version.
Type: This indicates the type of MPC Expansion. A gear icon indicates an MPC Expansion that is included by
default with the MPC software.
Close: Click this to close the window. Alternatively, press Esc.
121
Selecting Expansions
MPC Expansions can be used with plugin programs (see Programs > Plugin Programs to learn how to create a
plugin program).
To select an MPC Expansion for a plugin program, select the
track that uses that program, and then click the Plugin field in the
Program section of the Inspector.
In the window that appears:
Click the + or – button to expand or collapse each category.
Favorites are instrument plugins whose Fav box is selected
in the Plugin Manager.
The right edge of the window shows how many MIDI channels
can be sent to and from each plugin or MPC Expansion.
Select Sort by type to sort the list by type.
Select Sort by manufacturer to sort the list by manufacturer.
Double-click a plugin or MPC Expansion or click it and then
click Select to load it.
Click the gear icon to open the Plugin Manager. See Plugins
> Plugin Manager to learn about this.
Click Close or press Esc to close the window without loading
any plugin or MPC Expansion.
Exporting Expansions
You can export MPC Expansion Packs (installed on your computer) to your MPC X or MPC Live for use in its
Standalone Mode.
To export MPC Expansions:
1. Connect your MPC X or MPC Live to your computer. Make
sure both are powered on.
2. On your computer, open the MPC software.
3. On your MPC X or MPC Live, enter Controller Mode.
4. In the MPC software window, click the menu icon (≡), select
File > Export, and then click Expansion….
5. In the Export Expansion to Standalone MPC window that
appears, click the Drive menu and select a storage device that
you will use with your MPC X or MPC Live: the internal SATA
drive (if you have installed one in your MPC X or MPC Live), an
SD card, or a USB flash drive.
6. In the Expansions list, click the box next to each one to select or
deselect it. Only the selected ones will be exported. Click Select
all to select all of them or Select none to deselect all of them.
7. Click Export to start exporting, or click Cancel to close the
window and not export anything.
The exporting process creates an Expansions folder at the root
level of your storage device and copies your MPC Expansions
into it.
122
Modes
The MPC software is always in one of 14 modes. This chapter describes the various features and functions of each one.
To enter a mode, click its mode icon. If its icon is not shown, click the down arrow () to show a menu of all
modes, and then click it.
You can customize which mode icons are shown here by click the menu icon (≡) in the upper-left corner and going
to View > Toolbar > Toolbar Modes.
Important: If a sequence is currently playing, you will not be able to enter Song Mode. Stop playback before entering
Song Mode.
Click an icon below to skip directly to that chapter.
Main
Program Edit
Track View
Pad Mixer
Sample Edit
Step Sequencer
Channel Mixer
Sampler
Looper
Track Mute
Pad Mute
Song
Next Sequence
MIDI Control
123
Main Mode
Main Mode provides access to all three editors as well as basic track editing functions.
To enter Main Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the house icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Main Mode.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Main.
The upper half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab to enter the corresponding editor. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, and Project panel. Click the corresponding
selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels to learn more about the Q-Links or Project
panels. The Pads panel is described below.
124
Pads
When the MIDI tab is selected in Main Mode, the Pads panel shows information for each pad, depending on the
currently selected program.
Drum Programs and Keygroup Programs: Each pad will show the samples assigned to it (all four layers). Click
the Pad Bank letters to access additional pads or the full range of notes. For keygroup programs, Pad D13 plays
the sample at its original pitch. Click a pad to play its sample/samples or note.
Plugin Programs, MIDI Programs, and CV Programs: Each pad will show the note it will play as both a MIDI
note number (0–127) and note value (e.g., C-1, G#5, etc.). Click the Pad Bank letters to access the full range of
notes. Click a pad to play its note.
Clip Programs: Each pad will show the loop (clip) assigned to it. Click the Pad Bank letters to access additional
banks of clips. Click a pad to launch that clip. (If the clip belongs to a mute group, other clips in that mute group will
stop playing when that clip starts. See Program Edit Mode > Program Editor > Clip Programs to learn about this.)
Drum Program
Keygroup Program
Plugin, MIDI, or CV Program
Clip Program
Each pad can also display a color, which you can customize for each program. See General Features > Pad Color
to learn how to do this.
When the Audio tab is selected in Main Mode, the Pads panel is not available.
125
Track View Mode
Track View Mode gives you an overview of the tracks and programs of each sequence. You can use this
mode to edit multiple tracks at once in the current sequence.
To enter Track View Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the bars-and-magnifying-glass icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Track View.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Track View.
The upper half of the window displays the Track View. See General Features > Track View to learn more about this.
The lower half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
The only addition in Track View Mode is an option to keep the zoom distances of the upper and lower halves
of the window identical. You could also choose to allow them to remain independent.
To lock or unlock the tracks and editor, click the lock-and-arrows icon.
126
Program Edit Mode
Program Edit Mode contains all parameters for editing your Programs.
For drum programs, this mode includes the parameters of four layers as well as all synthesis parameters
and insert effect settings. See the Drum Programs section to learn more.
For keygroup programs, this mode contains slightly more parameters than drum programs. See the
Keygroup Programs section to learn more.
For plugin programs, this mode shows the graphical user interface for the plugin. Skip to Plugin Programs
to learn more.
For clip programs, this mode looks very different from that of other programs due to how clip launching
works. See the Clip Programs section to learn more.
For MIDI programs and CV programs, skip to MIDI Programs and CV Programs.
For general information on the differences between the types of programs, please see General Features >
Programs.
To enter Program Edit Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the four-pads icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Program Edit.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Program Edit.
127
The upper half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab to enter the corresponding editor. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, Program Editor panel, and Project panel.
Click the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels to learn more about the
Q-Links or Project panels. The Pads panel is described in this chapter here. The Program Editor panel is
described in this chapter here.
Pads
When the MIDI tab is selected in Program Edit Mode, the Pads panel shows information for each pad, depending on
the currently selected program.
Drum programs and keygroup programs: Each pad will show the samples assigned to it (all four layers). Click
the Pad Bank letters to access additional pads or the full range of notes. For keygroup programs, Pad D13 plays
the sample at its original pitch. Click a pad to play its sample/samples or note.
Plugin programs, MIDI programs, and CV programs: Each pad will show the note it will play as both a MIDI
note number (0–127) and note value (e.g., C-1, G#5, etc.). Click the Pad Bank letters to access the full range of
notes. Click a pad to play its note.
Clip programs, each pad will show the loop (clip) assigned to it. Click the Pad Bank letters to access additional
banks of clips. Click a pad to launch that clip. (If the clip belongs to a mute group, other clips in that mute group
will stop playing when that clip starts. See Program Editor > Clip Programs to learn about this.)
Drum Program
Keygroup Program
Plugin, MIDI, or CV Program
Clip Program
Each pad can also display a color, which you can customize for each program. See General Features > Pad Color to
learn how to do this. In Program Edit Mode, these colors will be displayed only when the pad is being played with the
exception of clip programs, whose pad colors will always be displayed to help you distinguish the pads’ mute groups.
When the Audio tab is selected in Program Edit Mode, the Pads panel is not available.
128
Program Editor
When the MIDI tab is selected in Program Edit Mode, the Program Editor shows different settings depending on the
type of program that is selected.
When the Audio tab is selected in Program Edit Mode, the Program Editor is non-functional.
Drum Programs
When using a drum program, the Program Editor shows the parameters for each pad and the program overall.
To select a pad, press it. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately.
In the Master section, set the playback mode and tuning for the overall program.
Note: The Sample Layers section has some parameters similar to those in this section (Semi, Fine). Remember that
the Master section parameters control the overall settings for the sample, while Sample Layers controls the settings
for each layer (up to 4).
Polyphony sets the playback mode for the program’s pads. In Mono Mode, only one pad will sound at a time. If
a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples, the new pad will immediately
mute all other currently playing pads in that program. In Poly Mode, several pads can be triggered at the same
time (limited only by the total number of voices available).
Semi lets you transpose the program up to 36 semitones up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of the program up to 99 cents up or down.
In the Pad section, set the volume and panning for the current pad.
Note: The Sample Layers section has some parameters similar to those in this section (Level, Pan). Remember that
the Pad section parameters control the overall settings for the sample, while Sample Layers controls the settings for
each layer (up to 4).
Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
The Simultaneous Play section lets you set up to four pads that can be triggered by pressing one pad only. This function
is useful for triggering a stack of sounds (e.g., layered bass drums). Use each Pad menu to select the desired pad.
The Mute Targets section lets you select up to four pads (in the same program) for the currently selected pad. When
the currently selected pad is played, it will immediately silence its mute targets. Use each Pad menu to select the
desired mute target.
Tips:
This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, especially if only the open or closed hat should be heard.
This feature is similar to the mute group feature, available for both drum programs and keygroup programs.
The Edit Zones section is an overview of any selected pads. Use the selector at the top to set how the selected
pads will be edited:
Current: Only the currently selected pad will be edited.
Multiple: All selected pads will be edited simultaneously.
All: All pads will be edited simultaneously.
129
The Sample Layers section shows four layers, each of which can use an assigned sample. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Click the Sample menu to select the sample for that layer. Remember that the sample has to be loaded into the
project’s sample pool beforehand.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer up to 99 cents up or down.
Level lets you adjust each layer’s volume, letting you control the “balance” of the samples assigned to the pad.
Use the pan knob to adjust the stereo placement of the respective layer.
Use the Velocity slider to define the velocity range of each layer.
A range from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from the respectve
pad while, for example, a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By
assigning several samples of one instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting
the velocity ranges of each layer accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a drum hit with low force, medium force, and high force. You can
set each sample to a layer and set the Velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only
mid-range velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
The Filter section lets you set the type and characteristics of the filter.
Click the Type menu to select a filter for the selected pad. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation
of the available filter types. You can set the default Type setting for new drum programs and keygroup programs
in Project tab of the Preferences (see General Features > Preferences).
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency
for band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Use the Res knob to set the resonance/emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result
in a strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
Use the Env knob to determine the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher
settings will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes
of the filter Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Env setting and set low Attack and Decay values
as well as a medium-low Sustain value of the Filter Envelope. This will start a sound with the filter opened and
close it shortly afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand,
can sound much more “alive” with low Env settings and a high Attack value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the
higher frequencies.
The Modulation Sources section lets you set how much velocity is required to modulate certain other parameters as
well as your filter envelope and amp enevelope.
V>Start (VelocityStart) sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the sample start point.
V>Attack (VelocityAttack) sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase
for the Amp envelope.
V>Env (VelocityEnvelope) enables velocity information to control the amount of the filter envelope’s effect on
the cutoff frequency.
V>Filter (VelocityFilter) uses the velocity to modulate the cutoff frequency directly.
The Filter Envelope controls affect the filter frequency. Use the fields or click and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with
the Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Amp Envelope controls affect level changes over time. Use the fields or click and drag the “handles” of the
envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter
frequency with the Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
130
The Pad Play Modes section lets you set the behavior for each pad’s samples in a drum program.
Click the Mute Group menu to assign the selected pad to one of the 32 available groups. When pads assigned
to the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A
mute group affects pads within that program only; mute groups do not affect pads in other programs.
Tip: This feature is useful for programming realistic hi-hats, especially if only the open or closed hat should be heard.
Click the Sample Play menu to determine how much of the sample is played.
One-Shot: The entire sample will play from start to end. Use this when you want to play short sounds.
Note-On: The sample will play only as long as the pad is held. This is better for longer samples so you can
control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad. If this option is selected, the Filter
Envelope and Amp Envelope will use an ADSR type rather than AD or AHDS (see Anatomy of an Envelope
to learn about this).
Click the Pad Poly menu to determine how the pad’s sound behaves when multiple hits are registered. When set
to Mono, only one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its
sample/samples, the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that program. When set to
Poly, several pads can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices available). You
can also select a specific number of pads (2–64) so that you can trigger up to this many pads at the same time
(unless they exceed the total number of voices available).
Click the Layer Play menu to determine how multiple samples assigned to the same pad are played:
Cycle: Each time the pad is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the samples will cycle
through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
Velocity: The pad will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
Random: Each time the pad is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random.
The Velocity Sensitivity section determines how much the velocity affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the attack
of the filter envelope (Attack), the volume level of the filter envelope (Amp) and or the panning of the sound (Pan).
Use the sliders to adjust the setting of each.
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding knob.
The LFO section lets you select a periodic waveform generated by the low-frequency oscillator. You can adjust the
frequency and shape for modulation purposes.
Click the Wave menu to select the LFO waveform type:
Sine (best suited for smooth modulations)
Triangle (best suited for smooth modulations)
S&H (samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated)
Saw (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
Saw Down (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
Square (interesting results with hard-panning modulations)
Noise (generates random values and glides)
Use the Rate knobs to determine the LFO frequency when Sync is on. At lower values, it might take some time
for the LFO to complete a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Click the Sync menu to set how the LFO’s rate is synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several
time divisions. When None is selected, Sync is off.
Use the Destinations sliders to determine how much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff
frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the sound (Amp) and panning of the sound (Pan).
131
Keygroup Programs
When using a keygroup program, the Program Editor shows the parameters for each keygroup and the program overall.
To select a keygroup, press a pad within that keygroup. Its parameters will appear on the screen immediately.
In the Master section, set the playback mode and tuning for the overall program.
Polyphony sets the playback mode for the program’s keygroups. In Mono Mode, only one keygroup will sound
at a time. If a keygroup is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples, the new
keygroup will immediately mute all other currently playing keygroups in that program. In Poly Mode, several
keygroups can be triggered at the same time (limited only by the total number of voices available).
Num of KG (number of keygroups) lets you create up to 128 keygroups within a keygroup program. This is useful
when working with multi-samples. For example, if you want to create a realistic piano, you can use different
keygroups (e.g., 88 for a grand piano) with every keygroup containing its own sampled note (with up to four
possible velocity layers).
Semi lets you tune the program up to 36 semitones up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of the program up to 99 cents up or down.
Trans shifts the pitch of the MIDI notes sent to the program up to 36 semitones up or down.
Use the Keygroup section to set the playback modes, level, tuning, and other settings for the keygroup.
Note: The Sample Layers section has some parameters similar to those in this section (Level, Pan, Semi, Fine).
Remember that Keygroup section parameters control the overall settings for the sample, while Sample Layers
controls the settings for each layer (up to 4).
KG Select (Keygroup Select) lets you select a specific keygroup for editing. This parameter works in conjunction
with the Num of KG (number of keygroups) parameter at the top of the window, which lets you create up to 128
keygroups within one keygroup program. A default keygroup program contains only one single keygroup. When
you have created more than one keygroup with Num of KG, use KG Select to select any keygroup for editing.
All selects all available keygroups of a keygroup program for simultaneous editing.
Key Track allows you to switch a sample’s automatic transposition on or off. If this is off, you will always hear
the same pitch of the sample, no matter which note is triggered by pads or a connected MIDI keyboard.
Level controls the overall volume level of the loaded sample/samples.
Pan controls the overall panning of the loaded sample/samples in the stereo field.
Note Range lets you restrict the key range used for a sample’s playback. Only notes with a key number higher
or equal (Lo) or lower and equal (Hi) to the selected value will trigger a sound.
Tip: Set the Lo parameter to A0 and the Hi parameter to C8 to emulate the range of a standard 88-key piano.
Pitch lets you transpose the sample 36 semitones up or down, while Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer up
to 99 cents up or down.
132
Click the KG Poly (keygroup polyphony) menu to determine how the keygroup will play. When set to Mono, only
one pad will sound at a time. If a pad is played while another (or the same one) is still playing its sample/samples,
the new pad will immediately mute all other currently playing pads in that program. When set to Poly, several
pads can be triggered at the same time, limited only by the total number of voices available. You can also select
a specific number of pads (2–64) so that you can play up to this many pads at the same time (unless they exceed
the total number of voices available).
Click the Mute Group menu to assign the selected pad to one of the 32 available groups. When pads assigned
to the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A
mute group affects pads within that program only; mute groups do not affect pads in other programs.
Layer Play determines how multiple samples assigned to the same pad are played:
Cycle: Each time the pad is played, it will play the next layer’s sample. In other words, the samples will cycle
through the layers as follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4… etc.
Velocity: The pad will switch between layers depending on how hard you press a pad.
Random: Each time the pad is played, it will play one of its layer’s samples at random.
Sample Play determines how much of the sample is played:
One-Shot: The entire sample will play from start to end. Use this when you want to play short sounds.
Note-On: The sample will play only as long as the pad is held. This is better for longer samples so you can
control a sound’s duration by pressing and holding its corresponding pad. If this option is selected, the Filter
Envelope and Amp Envelope will use an ADSR type rather than AD or AHDS (see Anatomy of an Envelope
to learn about this).
The Sample Layers section shows four layers, each of which can use an assigned sample. Each layer has identical,
independently assignable parameters.
Click the Sample menu to select the sample for that layer. Remember that the sample has to be loaded into the
project’s sample pool beforehand.
Semi lets you transpose the selected layer up to 36 semitones up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of each layer up to 99 cents up or down.
Level lets you adjust each layer’s volume, letting you control the “balance” of the samples assigned to the pad.
Use the pan knob to adjust the stereo placement of the respective layer.
Use the Velocity slider to define the velocity range of each layer.
A range from 0 to 127 lets the layer respond to the entire velocity range which is input from the respectve
pad while, for example, a range from 100 to 127 lets the layer respond only to higher velocity levels. By
assigning several samples of one instrument, you can create a realistic-sounding “multi-sample” by adjusting
the velocity ranges of each layer accordingly.
For example, you may have three samples of a piano key with low force, medium force, and high force. You can
set each sample to a layer and set the Velocity ranges so only low velocities trigger the low-force sample, only
mid-range velocities trigger the medium-force sample, and only high velocities trigger the high-force sample.
The Filter section lets you set the type and characteristics of the filter.
Click the Type menu to select a filter for the selected keygroup. See Appendix > Glossary > Filter for an explanation
of the available filter types. You can set the default Type setting for new drum programs and keygroup programs in
the Project tab of the Preferences (see General Features > Preferences).
Use the Cutoff knob to set the cutoff frequency for low-pass and high-pass filter types or the center frequency
for band-pass and band-stop filter types.
Use the Res knob to set the resonance/emphasis of the frequencies around the cutoff point.
Tip: Use values lower than 80 to give more brilliance to the sound. At values higher than 80, the sound will result
in a strong audible boost around the cutoff frequency.
Use the Env knob to determine the amount of influence the filter envelope has on the cutoff frequency. Higher
settings will increase the modulation of the filter by the envelope; lower settings will result in only subtle changes
of the filter Cutoff over time.
Tip: To give a sound a more distinctive attack, increase the Env setting and set low Attack and Decay values
as well as a medium-low Sustain value of the Filter Envelope. This will start a sound with the filter opened and
close it shortly afterward, giving it a bright start followed by a darker sustain. String sounds, on the other hand,
can sound much more “alive” with low Env settings and a high Attack value, resulting in a slight fade-in of the
higher frequencies.
133
The Modulation Sources section lets you set how much velocity is required to modulate certain other parameters as
well as your filter envelope and amp enevelope.
Kbd>Filter (KeyboardFilter) sets how much aftertouch data (from a pad) is needed to modulate the cutoff frequency.
V>Attack (VelocityAttack) sets how much velocity is needed (for a triggered pad) to modulate the Attack phase
for the Amp envelope.
V>Env (VelocityEnvelope) enables velocity information to control the amount of the filter envelope’s effect on
the cutoff frequency.
V>Filter (VelocityFilter) uses the velocity to modulate the cutoff frequency directly.
The Filter Envelope controls affect the filter frequency. Use the fields or click and drag the “handles” of the envelope
to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter frequency with
the Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Amp Envelope controls affect level changes over time. Use the fields or click and drag the “handles” of the
envelope to shape the envelope or time-variant modulation output. Adjust the envelope’s influence on the filter
frequency with the Env knob. See the later Anatomy of an Envelope section to learn about the envelope parameters.
The Velocity Sensitivity section determines how much the velocity affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the attack
of the filter envelope (Attack), the volume level of the filter envelope (Amp) and or the panning of the sound (Pan).
Use the sliders to adjust the setting of each.
When you press a pad softly, only minimal modulation is applied. When you press it harder, the modulation amount
also gets stronger depending on the setting of the corresponding knob.
The LFO section lets you select a periodic waveform generated by the low-frequency oscillator. You can adjust the
frequency and shape for modulation purposes.
Click the Wave menu to select the LFO waveform type:
Sine (best suited for smooth modulations)
Triangle (best suited for smooth modulations)
S&H (samples a random value and holds it until the next value is generated)
Saw (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
Saw Down (can generate interesting filter or volume changes)
Square (interesting results with hard-panning modulations)
Noise (generates random values and glides)
Use the Rate knobs to determine the LFO frequency when Sync is on. At lower values, it might take some time
for the LFO to complete a cycle, while higher values will come closer to audible range.
Click the Sync menu to set how the LFO’s rate is synchronized with the tempo. You can select one of several
time divisions. When None is selected, Sync is off.
Use the Destinations sliders to determine how much the LFO affects the pitch of the sound (Pitch), the cutoff
frequency of the filter (Filter), the volume level of the sound (Amp) and panning of the sound (Pan).
The Controller Mod section determines the influence of additional play controllers on various sound parameters.
Important: To use these parameters, make sure that a connected MIDI device can send pitch bend messages as
well as aftertouch and modulation wheel data.
Pitch Bend sets the range (in semitones) of a connected MIDI keyboard’s pitch-bend wheel.
Wheel>LFO determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s modulation wheel affects the LFO intensity.
Aft>Filt (AftertouchFilter Cutoff) determines how much a connected MIDI keyboard’s aftertouch data affects
the filter cutoff.
134
Plugin Programs
When using a plugin program, the Program Editor shows the parameters of that plugin. Its appearance and available
options depend on the plugin.
MIDI Programs
When using a MIDI program, the Program Editor shows a series of knobs corresponding to MIDI CC values—six
banks of knobs with 16 knobs in each bank (a total of 96 knobs).
To set the MIDI CC of a knob, click the area above it next to down arrow icon () and select a number from the menu.
To adjust the value that each MIDI CC sends, click and drag its knob.
135
Clip Programs
When using a clip program, the Program Editor shows various
settings to determine how each pad launches its assigned
sample (a loop called a clip).
To select a pad, press it. Its parameters will appear in the
Program Editor panel immediately, and it will appear in the
Wave Editor in the upper half of the window (see General
Features > Editors > Wave Editor to learn about this).
To learn how to assign a clip to a pad, use the menu at the
top of the Pad section (described below) or see General
Features > Programs > Clip Programs.
The Program section lets you adjust the program’s overall
tuning and quantization.
Semi lets you transpose the program up to 36 semitones
up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of the program up to 99 cents
up or down.
Click the Quantize menu to set the quantization of the
program: 1/64 bar, 1/32 bar, 1/16 bar, 1/8 bar, 1/4 bar,
1/2 bar, 1 bar, 2 bars, 4 bars, 8 bars, or None. When set
to None, the program will not follow any quantization at all.
The Pad section controls how the clip plays.
Click the menu at the top of the Pad section to select the clip you want to assign to the pad.
Use the Start or End fields to set the start point or end point of the region of the clip that will be played.
Alternatively, click and drag the green start point marker and red end point marker in the Wave Editor.
Use the Pad Play field to determine how the clip is played.
One Shot: When you press the pad, the entire clip will play from start to end and then stop.
Toggle: When you press the pad, the entire clip will play from start to end and loop indefinitely. Pressing it
again—or launching another in the same mute group—will stop its playback. This is the most common usage.
Semi lets you transpose the pad up to 36 semitones up or down.
Fine provides fine-tuning of the pad up to 99 cents up or down.
Click the Mute Group menu to assign the selected pad to one of the 32 available groups. When pads assigned
to the same mute group receive MIDI notes, the last pad played will silence all other pads in that mute group. A
mute group affects pads within that program only; mute groups do not affect pads in other programs.
Note: By default, each column of pads is assigned to the same mute group. This means only one pad from each
column can be playing its clip at a time. You can use the Mute Group field to configure this any way you like, though.
Click the Pad Quantize menu to set the quantization of the pad: 1/64 bar, 1/32 bar, 1/16 bar, 1/8 bar, 1/4 bar,
1/2 bar, 1 bar, 2 bars, 4 bars, 8 bars, None, or Program. When set to Program, the pad uses the same
quantization as the overall program (the Quantize field in the adjacent Program section). When set to Off, the
pad will not follow any quantization at all.
Click Warp to lengthen or shorten the clip without changing its pitch, and use the BPM field to change the
tempo. Use the Coarse and Fine sliders if you want to change the pitch.
Note: The Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio drop-outs during playback if used too
freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp function.
Click Reverse to reverse the clip’s audio.
Use the Fade button to apply a very small fade-in and fade-out at the start and end of the clip. This can help prevent
“clicks” and glitches that may occur if the start point or end point is not placed at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.”
136
CV Programs
When using a CV program, the Program Editor shows a series of knobs. The first eight knobs correspond to CV
Outputs 1–8. Although this option is selectable, it is usable only with MPC hardware that has CV outputs (e.g., MPC X).
To set the CV output of a knob, click the area above it next to down arrow () and select an output from the menu.
To adjust the voltage of each one, click and drag its knob.
137
Anatomy of an Envelope
An envelope creates a variable control signal. It can be used, for instance, to modulate the filter settings of a sound
over a given period of time.
For drum programs, use the AD/AHDS selector to select an AD or AHDS envelope. When Sample Play is set to
Note-On, it will use an ADSR envelope.
Keygroup programs use AHDS envelopes. When Sample Play is set to Note-On, it will use an ADSR envelope.
With AHDS envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time defined by Attack, the sample volume rises
to its maximum value.
2. The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained during the Hold phase.
3. During the Decay phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop to
the Sustain level.
4. The sample’s volume will stay at the Sustain level until the pad is
released.
With AD envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time defined by Attack, the sample volume rises
to its maximum value.
2. The sample’s maximum volume will be maintained until its Decay
phase, when the sample’s volume will gradually drop to “zero” over the
set duration. Click the Type drop-down menu to select how the decay
functions:
Decay From Start: The volume will start decreasing immediately
after reaching its maximum level.
Decay From End: The maximum volume will be maintained for a
hold phase until it reaches the decay phase.
With ADSR envelopes, the following happens when you trigger a sample:
1. Within the period of time defined by Attack, the sample volume rises
to its maximum value.
2. During the Decay phase, the sample’s volume will gradually drop to
the Sustain level.
3. The sample’s volume will stay at the Sustain level until the Release
phrase begins.
4. The sample’s volume will drop to “zero” over the duration set by Release.
138
Sample Edit Mode
Sample Edit Mode lets you edit samples using various functions.
To enter Sample Edit Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the waveform-and-flags icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Sample Edit.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Sample Edit.
•
Double-click the desired sample in the Project panel or Project Info Browser.
•
Right-click the desired sample in the Project panel or Project Info Browser, and click Edit.
To select a sample to edit, click it in the Project panel or Project Info Browser.
139
The upper half of the window shows the waveform. While you can edit
the waveform in this part of the window, it is different from the
standard Wave Editor.
The large waveform display shows the “active” section of the sample
waveform. The strip above the large display shows an overview of the
entire sample waveform. If the waveform display is showing only part
of the entire sample waveform, a white box in the overview will
indicate the current position.
The timeline provides a reference for the length of the sample. Click
the down arrow () or right-click anywhere on the timeline to select
the increments it will use: Time (secs:ms), Samples, or Beats.
Scroll left or right on the waveform to move through it. Use the sliders
in the lower-right corner or click the timeline and drag down or up to
zoom in or out.
The green marker and red marker are the start point and end point
(respectively). These two points define the region of the sample that
will be played.
To move the start point or end point of the selected region, do
either of the following:
•
Click and drag its marker left or right.
•
Use the Start or End fields in the Parameters panel.
•
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the start point
or the second column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the end point.
The top-most Q-Link knob provides coarse adjustment (x1000),
while the bottom-most one knob provides fine adjustment (x1).
Tip: A recorded sample may have some silence at the beginning or end, which makes it difficult to time it correctly in
a musical context. Fix this by adjusting the start point. You can also adjust end point to remove any extra silence or
unwanted audio at the end. In addition to making your workflow easier, having a “tight,” well-edited sample can
enhance your production or performance.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, Parameters panel, and Project panel.
Click the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels > Project to learn more
about the Project panel.
The other three panels vary based on the current editing method: Trim Mode, Chop Mode, or Program Mode. The
options for each mode are slightly different. Please refer to the following Trim Mode, Chop Mode, and Program
Mode parts of this chapter to learn how each works.
Tip: You can use Trim Mode for a specific slice of the sample, previously created and selected in Chop Mode. This
allows for a more detailed view of a single slice than in Chop Mode and gives you more options for auditioning the
slice. You can easily switch between Trim Mode and Chop Mode while doing this.
To use both Trim Mode and Chop Mode to edit a sample slice:
1. Click Chop in the Q-Links panel.
2. Set all fields as desired to create your sample slices.
3. Select the desired slice.
4. Click Trim in the Q-Links panel. The region you are now editing is indicated by the normal start point and end
point markers rather than slice markers.
•
Click Chop at any time to return to Chop Mode.
140
Trim Mode
We recommend using Trim Mode to simply crop the start and/or end from a sample.
To enter Trim Mode, click the Trim tab in the Q-Links panel.
Q-Links
In the Q-Links panel:
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the start point. This is the
same as adjusting the Start field in the Parameters panel.
Use the second column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the end point. This is
the same as adjusting the End field in the Parameters panel.
Use the third column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the loop point if Loop Lock
is off. If Loop Lock is on, adjusting the loop point will also adjust the start
point. This is the same as adjusting the Loop field in the Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 16 to select the desired slice, if the sample has been split
into multiple slices in Chop Mode. This is the same as adjusting the Slice
field in the Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 8 to scroll through the waveform in the large waveform
display above.
Use Q-Link Knob 4 to zoom in or zoom out of the waveform.
For the first three columns, the top-most Q-Link knob provides coarse adjustment
(x1000), while the bottom-most one knob provides fine adjustment (x1).
141
When Link Slices is enabled (after you have created slices in Chop Mode), changing the start point of a slice will also
change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change the start point of
the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample. This is
the same as clicking the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Link Slices submenu.
Important: Link Slices must be disabled to make slices nonsequential, noncontiguous, or overlapping.
Enable Zero Snap to force start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.”
This can help to avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample. This is the same as clicking the gear icon in the
upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Zero Snap submenu.
Pads
The Pads panel enables you to play certain parts of the selected sample:
Play Sample (One Shot) (Pad 10) plays the sample once from the start
point to the end point. Press the pad once to play it.
Play Sample (Note On) (Pad 11) plays the sample once from the start
point to the end point. Press and hold the pad to play it, and release the
pad to stop playing it. Alternatively, click and hold anywhere in the
waveform display.
Play Loop Continuous (Pad 16) plays the sample repeatedly from the
loop point to the end point.
Play Loop (Pad 13) plays the sample from the loop point to the end point.
Press and hold the pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play to Loop Start (Pad 14) plays the part of the sample just before the
loop point. Press and hold the pad to play it, and release the pad to stop
playing it.
Play from Loop Start (Pad 15) plays the sample from the loop point to
the end of the sample regardless of the end point. Press and hold the
pad to play it, and release the pad to stop playing it.
Play All (Pad 9) plays the entire sample.
Pads 1–4 have the same respective functions as Pads 5–8, but Pads 1–4 play the sample part as “One Shots”
(pressing the pad once will play the entire part) while Pads 5–8 play the sample part as “Note Ons” (pressing the pad
and holding it will play the part; releasing it will stop playback):
Play from Start (Pad 1, Pad 5) plays the sample from the start point to the end point.
Play to Start (Pad 2, Pad 6) plays the part of the sample just before the start point to the start point.
Play to End (Pad 3, Pad 7) plays the part of the sample just before the end point to the end point.
Play from End (Pad 4, Pad 8) plays the part of the sample from the end point to the end of the sample.
142
Parameters
The Parameters panel includes controls for editing the sample length and
tuning as well as buttons for assigning the sample (see this section) and
processing the slice or sample (see this section).
Use the Slice field to select the desired slice, if the sample has been split
into multiple slices in Chop Mode. This is the same as adjusting Q-Link
Knob 16 in the Q-Links panel.
Use the Start field to adjust the start point. This is the same as adjusting the
first column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Use the End field to adjust the end point. This is the same as adjusting the
second column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Use the Loop field to adjust the loop point if Loop Lock is off. If Loop Lock
is on, adjusting the loop point will also adjust the start point. This is the
same as adjusting the third column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Click the Lock button to turn Loop Lock on or off. When on, the loop point
is the same as the start point. When off, the loop point is independent from
the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker.
Click the Loop menu to cycle between the three loop modes:
Off: The sample will not loop.
Forward (Fwd): When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing
again from the loop point.
Reverse (Rev): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in
reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it will return to the end
point and continue playing in reverse.
Alternating (Alt): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in
reverse. When it reaches the loop point again, it will start playing forward
again from the loop point.
Use the Tune field to transpose the sample from its original pitch up to
24.00 semitones up or down.
Use the Root Nt field to set the root note of the sample. This defines which
note will play the sample at its original pitch when in a keygroup program.
143
Click From BPM to tune a sample to the current sequence. In the Edit Tuning
window that appears:
Use the Beats field to match the number of beats in the sequence.
To tune the sample to the sequence, click Match. The Tune field will adjust
automatically and close the window. The sample is now tuned to the sequence.
To tune the sample to the sequence and adjust the sequence tempo, click
To Sequence. This is the same as clicking Match but it also changes the
sequence’s tempo to the BPM shown in the Tempo field on the right.
To close the window, click Close.
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually. You can also click X2 to double the
value or /2 to halve it.
Click Detect BPM to automatically detect the tempo. In the Detect BPM window
that appears:
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually. You can also click X2 to double
the value or /2 to halve it.
Click Detect to detect the tempo automatically.
Click Tap Tempo at the bottom of the window at the desired rate to use it as
the tempo. You can play a sequence in the background to help with your timing.
Click Close to close the window.
144
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Trim Mode.
Click Assign to assign a sample. In the Assign Sample window that appears, you can click the Assign To menu to
select a different assignment, and then click Do It to assign the sample or Cancel to close the window without
assigning the sample.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
If you set the Assign To menu to Assign slice to a pad, the pad will simply
refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample. This is useful
for reducing clutter in your project.
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Use the Slice Type menu to select how the pad’s layer settings will be set
when the slice is assigned to it:
Non-Destructive Slice: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to the slice
number.
Pad Parameters: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad. The Pad
Start and Pad End will be set to the slice’s start point and end point
values, and the Loop Position will be set to the slice’s start point but
with Pad Loop deactivated.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to add
the slice.
If you set the Assign To menu to Make new sample, this will create a new
sample in your project. (The original sample will remain as it is.)
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Select the Crop Sample box to delete the unused parts from the sample
when it’s created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though the
project will still contain your original sample.
Leave this box deselected to keep the unused parts of the sample when it
is created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to edit the entire
sample further even though you are using only part of it at the moment.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to add
the slice.
145
Processing Slices & Samples
Use the column of Process buttons to select an editing process. In the Process Sample window that appears, you
can click the Function menu to select a different process, and then click Do It to apply the process or Cancel to
close the window without processing the sample.
You can use any of these functions as described below.
Note: All Slice processes will affect only the part of the sample between the start point and the end point. The Sample
processes (Bit Reduce and Stereo > Mono) will affect the entire sample regardless of its start point or end point.
The Discard process deletes the regions before the start point and after
the end point.
The Delete process deletes the region between the start point and end
point and closes the gap between them.
The Silence process replaces the region between the start point and end
point with silence.
The Extract process deletes the regions before the start point and after the
end point and saves it as a new sample in your current project.
Use the Name field to name the new sample.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a
snare drum hit, a kick drum hit, etc. to use separately in the project.
The Normalize process increases a sample’s level to the highest level
possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind of digital gain
optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings
when working with samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
146
The Reverse process reverses the region between the start point and end
point.
The Fade In process sets a fade-in between the start point and end point.
Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Fade Out process sets a fade-out between the start point and end
point. Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Pitch Shift process changes the pitch of the sample without changing
its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch to your sequence without
affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Keep in mind that the audio
quality may decrease at more extreme settings.
Use the Pitch field to shift the pitch up to 12.00 semitones up or down.
The Time Stretch process lengthens or shortens the sample without
changing its pitch. This is useful for matching the durations of two samples
with different pitches. You can enter the original tempo of the sample and
the desired tempo after processing.
Use the Number of Beats field to set the desired value number of beats.
Use the New field to set the new tempo. The Ratio field will then
automatically show the time stretch factor.
Alternatively, to adjust the ratio instead, use the Ratio field to set the
desired ratio, and then the New field will change automatically based
on the new time stretch factor.
147
The Gain Change process raises or lowers the volume of the sample.
Use the Gain Amount field to adjust the gain up to 18 dB up or down.
This function is different than Normalize because it will allow volumes
beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to
watch your output level!
The Copy process saves a copy of the sample.
Use the Name field to name the new sample. Otherwise, the process
will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
The Bit Reduce process lowers the bit resolution of a sample, effectively
reducing its degree of faithful reproduction.
Use the Bit Depth field to set the bit depth from 1 bit to 16 bits.
The resulting sound is similar to the Resampler effect, but Bit Reduce will
permanently alter the sample.
Tip: Use this on drum loops to get a dirty, “old-school” sizzle but with a
digital “edge.”
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or
end point.
The Stereo > Mono process converts a stereo sample to a new mono sample
and saves it as a new sample.
Click the Source menu to select which channels will be converted:
•
Left will convert the left channel only.
•
Right will convert the right channel only.
•
Sum will combine the left and right audio channels to a single
mono channel.
Use the Name field to name the new sample. Otherwise, the process
will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
Note: This process affects the entire sample regardless of its start point or
end point.
148
Chop Mode
While Trim Mode crops only the start and/or end off of a sample, Chop Mode divides the sample into multiple regions
called slices. We recommend using Chop Mode when working with a long sample with different sounds throughout
(e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To enter Chop Mode, click the Chop in the Q-Links panel.
To select a slice to edit, do one of the following:
•
Click the lower half of the slice in the waveform in the upper half of the window.
•
Click the corresponding pad in the Pads panel.
•
Use Q-Link Knob 16.
•
Adjust the Slice field in the Parameters panel.
149
Q-Links
In the Q-Links panel:
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the start point. This is the
same as adjusting the Start field in the Parameters panel.
Use the second column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the end point. This is
the same as adjusting the End field in the Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 15 to adjust the cue playhead. This is the same as
adjusting the Cue field in the Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 16 to select the desired slice. This is the same as
adjusting the Slice field in the Parameters panel or clicking or pressing the
corresponding pad.
Use Q-Link Knob 8 to scroll through the waveform in the large waveform
display above.
Use Q-Link Knob 4 to zoom in or zoom out of the waveform.
When the Chop To menu is set to Regions, use Q-Link Knob 11 to set into
how many regions the sample will be divided.
When the Chop To menu is set to Threshold, use Q-Link Knob 11 to set
the threshold level.
For the first three columns, the top-most Q-Link knob provides coarse adjustment
(x1000), while the bottom-most one knob provides fine adjustment (x1).
When Link Slices is enabled, changing the start point of a slice will also change the end point of the previous slice.
Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change the start point of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you
are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample. This is the same as clicking the gear icon in
the upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Link Slices submenu.
Important: Link Slices must be disabled to make slices nonsequential, noncontiguous, or overlapping.
Enable Zero Snap to force start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.”
This can help to avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample. This is the same as clicking the gear icon in the
upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Zero Snap submenu.
Pads
The Pads panel enables you to play and select each slice of the selected sample:
Press the pad to play and select its corresponding the slice. If your sample has
more than 16 slices, use the additional pad banks. This is the same as turning
Q-Link Knob 16 in the Q-Links panel or using the Slice field in the Parameters
panel.
Note: When the Pad Audition menu is set to One Shot, clicking or pressing the
pad will play the slice from its start marker. When Pad Audition is set to Note
On, clicking (or pressing) and then holding the pad will play the slice from its
start marker—releasing the pad will stop playback.
150
Parameters
The Parameters panel includes controls for editing the sample length and tuning as well as buttons for converting or
assigning the sample (see this section) and processing the slice or sample (see this section).
Use the Chop To menu to choose how you want to use Chop Mode:
Manual
This method lets you insert slices at locations you select.
Threshold
This method uses an adjustable detection algorithm that derives the number of
slices created from the volume levels present in the sample.
Use the Threshold field to set the threshold level. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob
11. The higher the selected value, the more slices will be created.
Use the Min Time field to set the minimum length of a slice in milliseconds.
Regions
This method divides a sample into slices of equal length.
Use the Num Regions field to set into how many regions the sample will be
divided. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 11. The higher the selected value, the
more slices will be created.
BPM
This method divides a sample into slices based on the tempo (beats per minute).
Use the Bars field to set how many bars are in the sample. Alternatively, turn the
second Q-Link knob in the third bank.
Use the Beats field to set how many beats are in each bar. Alternatively, turn the
third Q-Link knob in the third bank.
Use the Time Div field to set a note division. Alternatively, turn the bottom-most
Q-Link knob in the third bank. The slice markers will be placed according to this
setting. You can select 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32. (In most cases, you should set this
parameter to 1/16.)
151
Use the Slice field to select the desired slice. This is the same as turning Q-Link Knob
16 field in the Q-Links panel or clicking or pressing the corresponding pad.
Use the Start field to adjust the start point. This is the same as turning the first
column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Use the End field to adjust the end point. This is the same as turning the second
column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Note: When Link Slices is enabled, changing the start point of a slice will also change
the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also
change the start point of the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you are trying to create
slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample.
Click +Slice (under the End field) to add a slice at the current playhead position. You
can do this at any point during sample playback.
To insert a slice marker manually, click the upper part of the waveform at the
desired location (the cursor will appear as a red arrow with a + symbol: +).
To insert a slice marker during sample playback, press an unlit pad (usually Pad 1)
to start playback of the sample, and then press an unlit pad during playback to place
a slice marker at each location of the playhead. (If you press a lit pad, playback will
restart from that pad’s corresponding slice marker.) The number of the pad that is lit
green is the number of the most-recently inserted slice marker. The numbers of the
pads that are lit yellow are the numbers of the slice markers that are already inserted.
Click the – button (to the right of the Slice field) to combine the currently selected slice
with the one before it.
Click the + button (to the right of the Slice field) to split the currently selected slice into
two slices of the same size.
Click –All (to the right of the Slice field) to remove all slices from a sample.
The cue playhead is useful when manually inserting slice markers. You can set its
position and behavior to suit your workflow.
Use the Cue field (below the Start field) to adjust the position of the cue playhead.
Alternatively, click and drag the white marker with the triangle () in the timeline.
Click >Play to play the sample from the cue playhead.
Click +Slice to create a slice marker at the cue playhead position.
Click the Cue Audition menu to select how the audio plays from the cue playhead:
One Shot: Clicking >Play will play the entire sample from the cue playhead.
Toggle: Clicking >Play once will start playback from cue playhead. Clicking it
once more will stop playback.
Click the Pad Audition menu to select how each slice plays from each start marker
when you press the corresponding pad:
One Shot: Clicking or pressing the pad will play the slice from its start marker.
Note On: Clicking (or pressing) and then holding the pad will play the slice from its
start marker. Releasing the pad will stop playback.
152
Converting or Assigning Slices
In Chop Mode, you can assign your new sample directly to a pad or convert the new sample into a new program or
patched phrase.
Use the buttons in the Non-Destructive Convert and Extract New Samples sections to select a conversion and
assignment process. In the Convert or Assign Slices window that appears, you can click the Convert To menu to
select a different process, and then click Do It to apply the process or Close to close the window without processing
the sample.
If you set the Convert To menu to New [program type] program using
slices, this will create a new program and assign the sample’s slices to its
pads. The pads will simply refer to the slices in this sample instead of
creating new samples. This is useful for reducing clutter in your project.
The new program will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
Use the Slice Type menu to select how each pad’s layer settings will
be set when the slices are assigned to them (see Program Edit Mode
to learn more about the parameters mentioned below):
Non-Destructive Slice: Each pad’s Slice setting will be set to the
slice number.
Pad Parameters: Each pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad. The
Pad Start and Pad End parameters will be set to the slice’s start
point and end point values, and the Loop Pos parameter will be
set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Select the Create Events box to automatically create a new track for
the new program in which each pad plays its corresponding slice in
ascending sequence by pad number.
If Create Events is selected, use the Bars field to set how many bars
the slices’ events will occupy.
If you set the Convert To menu to New clip program, this will create a
new clip program and assign the sample’s slices to its pads as clips. The
pads will simply refer to the slices in this sample instead of creating new
samples. This is useful for reducing clutter in your project. The new
program will be named after the sample and appended with ch.
Use the Tempo field to enter the tempo of the clips in the new program.
Select the Create Events box to automatically create a new track for
the new program in which each pad plays its corresponding slice in
ascending sequence by pad number.
If Create Events is selected, use the Number of Bars field to set how
many bars the slices’ events will occupy.
153
If you set the Convert To menu to New program with new samples, this
will create a new sample from each slice and assign them to pads in a new
program.
The new program will be named after the sample and appended with ch. The
new samples will be appended with SI-# (where # is a consecutive number).
Select the Crop Samples box to delete the unused parts from the
sample when they are created and assigned. This feature is
destructive, though the project will still contain your original sample.
Leave this box deselected to keep the unused parts of the samples
when they’re created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to
edit the entire samples further even though you are using only part of
them at the moment.
By default, this option already will create a new program. You can
deselect the Create New Program box to convert each slice into a
sample that is placed in the project’s sample pool but not assigned to
a program or pad.
If Create New Program is selected, select the Create Events box to
automatically create a new track in which each pad plays its
corresponding slice in ascending sequence by pad number.
If Create Events is selected, use the Number of Bars field to set how
many bars the slices’ events will occupy.
If you set the Convert To menu to Assign slice to a pad, the pad will
simply refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample.
This is useful for reducing clutter in your project.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample
on the first layer of the pad.
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Use the Slice Type menu to select how the pad’s layer settings will be
set when the slice is assigned to it (see Program Edit Mode to learn
more about the parameters mentioned below):
Non-Destructive Slice: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to the
slice number.
Pad Parameters: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad. The
Pad Start and Pad End will be set to the slice’s start point and
end point values, and the Loop Position will be set to the slice’s
start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to
add the slice.
154
If you set the Convert To menu to New Sample to Pad, this will create a
new sample in your project. (The original sample will remain as it is.)
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample
on the first layer of the pad.
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Select the Crop Sample box to delete the unused parts from the
sample when it’s created and assigned. This feature is destructive,
though the project will still contain your original sample.
Leave this box deselected to keep the unused parts of the sample
when it is created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to edit
the entire sample further even though you are using only part of it at
the moment.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to
add the slice.
If you set the Convert To menu to Patched phrase, this will create a new
sample that will play based on the tempo of your Sequence, and places it
in the current project. The patched phrase will have the same name as the
original sample but appended with pp and will use a different icon when
viewing your project information.
Use the Bars field to set how many bars long the patched phrase is
meant to be.
155
Processing Slices
Use the column of Process buttons to select an editing process. In the Process Sample window that appears, you
can click the Function menu to select a different process, and then click Do It to apply the process or Cancel to
close the window without processing the sample.
You can use any of these functions as described below.
Important: Chop Mode is non-destructive: You can choose the slice/edit behavior without destroying your original
sample, giving you more control over sample playback; you can save your sliced sample and but also reuse all of the
slice data in another project.
The Silence process replaces the region between the start point and end
point with silence.
The Extract process deletes the regions before the start point and after the
end point and saves it as a new sample in your current project.
Use the Name field to name the new sample.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a
snare drum hit, a kick drum hit, etc. to use separately in the project.
The Normalize process increases a sample’s level to the highest level
possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind of digital gain
optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings
when working with samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
The Reverse process reverses the region between the start point and end
point.
156
The Fade In process sets a fade-in between the start point and end point.
Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Fade Out process sets a fade-out between the start point and end
point. Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Pitch Shift process changes the pitch of the sample without changing
its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch to your sequence without
affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Keep in mind that the audio
quality may decrease at more extreme settings.
Use the Pitch field to shift the pitch up to 12.00 semitones up or down.
The Gain Change process raises or lowers the volume of the sample.
Use the Gain Amount field to adjust the gain up to 18 dB up or down.
This function is different than Normalize because it will allow volumes
beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to
watch your output level!
157
Program Mode
Program Mode lets you edit a sample in the context of the program in which you will use it. You can adjust the pad
parameters as though you were in Program Edit Mode, auditioning and hearing how it will sound in the program’s
audio path.
To enter Program Mode, click Program in the Q-Links panel.
Q-Links
In the Q-Links panel:
Use the first column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the start point. This is the
same as adjusting the Start field in the Parameters panel.
Use the second column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the end point. This is the
same as adjusting the End field in the Parameters panel.
Use the third column of Q-Link knobs to adjust the loop point if Loop Lock
is off. If Loop Lock is on, adjusting the loop point will also adjust the start
point. This is the same as adjusting the Loop field in the Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 16 to display either the sample as it has been edited (Pad)
or the entire sample (All). This is the same as adjusting the Slice field in the
Parameters panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 8 to scroll through the waveform in the large waveform
display above.
Use Q-Link Knob 4 to zoom in or zoom out of the waveform.
For the first three columns, the top-most Q-Link knob provides coarse adjustment
(x1000), while the bottom-most one knob provides fine adjustment (x1).
158
When Link Slices is enabled (after you have created slices in Chop Mode), changing the start point of a slice will also
change the end point of the previous slice. Similarly, changing the end point of a slice will also change the start point of
the next slice. Disable Link Slices if you are trying to create slices that use non-contiguous parts of the sample. This is
the same as clicking the gear icon in the upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Link Slices submenu.
Important: Link Slices must be disabled to make slices nonsequential, noncontiguous, or overlapping.
Enable Zero Snap to force start points, end points, and loop points to occur only at the waveform’s “zero-crossings.”
This can help to avoid clicks and glitches when playing a sample. This is the same as clicking the gear icon in the
upper-right corner of the Wave Editor and using the Zero Snap submenu.
Pads
The Pads panel shows their assigned samples in the current program.
Click each pad to hear its sample/samples. The sample on its first layer will
automatically appear in the waveform display for editing.
Parameters
The Parameters panel includes controls for editing the sample length and
tuning as well as buttons for assigning the sample (see this section) and
processing the slice or sample (see this section).
Use the Slice field to display either the sample as it has been edited (Pad) or
the entire sample (All). This is the same as adjusting Q-Link Knob 16 in the
Q-Links panel.
If the Slice field is set to All, you can display the sample as it has been
edited but keep the start point and end point by clicking To Pad. The Slice
field will change to Pad, but the start point and end point will remain in their
current locations.
Use the Start field to adjust the start point. This is the same as adjusting the
first column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Use the End field to adjust the end point. This is the same as adjusting the
second column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
Use the Loop field to adjust the loop point if Loop Lock is off. If Loop Lock
is on, adjusting the loop point will also adjust the start point. This is the
same as adjusting the third column of Q-Link knobs in the Q-Links panel.
159
Click the Lock button to turn Loop Lock on or off. When on, the loop point is the same as the start point. When off,
the loop point is independent from the start point and indicated by a separate loop marker.
Click the Loop menu to cycle between the three loop modes:
Off: The sample will not loop.
Forward (Fwd): When the loop reaches its end point, it will start playing again from the loop point.
Reverse (Rev): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point again,
it will return to the end point and continue playing in reverse.
Alternating (Alt): When the loop reaches its end point, it will play in reverse. When it reaches the loop point
again, it will start playing forward again from the loop point.
Use the Tune field to transpose the sample from its original pitch up to 24.00 semitones up or down.
Use the Root Nt field to set the root note of the sample. This defines which note will play the sample at its original
pitch when in a keygroup program.
Click From BPM to tune a sample to the current sequence. In the Edit Tuning
window that appears:
Use the Beats field to match the number of beats in the sequence.
To tune the sample to the sequence, click Match. The Tune field will adjust
automatically and close the window. The sample is now tuned to the sequence.
To tune the sample to the sequence and adjust the sequence tempo, click
To Sequence. This is the same as clicking Match but it also changes the
sequence’s tempo to the BPM shown in the Tempo field on the right.
To close the window, click Close.
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually. You can also click X2 to double the
value or /2 to halve it.
Click Detect BPM to automatically detect the tempo. In the Detect BPM window
that appears:
Use the BPM field to enter a tempo manually. You can also click X2 to double
the value or /2 to halve it.
Click Detect to detect the tempo automatically.
Click Tap Tempo at the bottom of the window at the desired rate to use it as
the tempo. You can play a sequence in the background to help with your timing.
Click Close to close the window.
160
Assigning Samples
You can assign your new sample directly to a pad from Program Mode.
Click Assign to assign a sample. In the Assign Sample window that appears, you can click the Assign To menu to
select a different assignment, and then click Do It to assign the sample or Cancel to close the window without
assigning the sample.
Important: Assigning a sample to a pad in this way will replace the sample on the first layer of the pad.
If you set the Assign To menu to Assign slice to a pad, the pad will simply
refer to the slice in this sample instead of creating a new sample. This is useful
for reducing clutter in your project.
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Use the Slice Type menu to select how the pad’s layer settings will be set
when the slice is assigned to it:
Non-Destructive Slice: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to the slice
number.
Pad Parameters: The pad’s Slice setting will be set to Pad. The Pad
Start and Pad End will be set to the slice’s start point and end point
values, and the Loop Position will be set to the slice’s start point but
with Pad Loop deactivated.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to add
the slice.
If you set the Assign To menu to Make new sample, this will create a new
sample in your project. (The original sample will remain as it is.)
Use the Pad menu to select the desired pad. Alternatively, press the
desired pad.
Select the Crop Sample box to delete the unused parts from the sample
when it’s created and assigned. This feature is destructive, though the
project will still contain your original sample.
Leave this box deselected to keep the unused parts of the sample when it
is created and assigned. This way, you will still be able to edit the entire
sample further even though you are using only part of it at the moment.
Use the Program menu to specify the program to which you want to add
the slice.
161
Processing Slices
Use the column of Process buttons to select an editing process. In the Process Sample window that appears, you
can click the Function menu to select a different process, and then click Do It to apply the process or Cancel to
close the window without processing the sample.
You can use any of these functions as described below.
Important: Program Mode is non-destructive: You can choose the slice/edit behavior without destroying your
original sample, giving you more control over sample playback; you can save your sliced sample and but also reuse
all of the slice data in another project. See the Program Edit Mode chapter to learn more about setting a pad to play
the entire sample, a specific slice of a sample, or a specific region of the sample (independent of its slice markers).
The Silence process replaces the region between the start point and end
point with silence.
The Extract process deletes the regions before the start point and after the
end point and saves it as a new sample in your current project.
Use the Name field to name the new sample.
Tip: This is useful if you recorded a drum loop and wanted to remove just a
snare drum hit, a kick drum hit, etc. to use separately in the project.
The Normalize process increases a sample’s level to the highest level
possible without distortion. This is essentially a kind of digital gain
optimization, so you do not have to worry about excessive level settings
when working with samples with a wide range of amplitudes.
The Reverse process reverses the region between the start point and end
point.
162
The Fade In process sets a fade-in between the start point and end point.
Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio in with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio in with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio in with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Fade Out process sets a fade-out between the start point and end
point. Click the Type menu to select a type of fade:
Linear fades the audio out with a linear curve—a straight line between
the start and end.
Log fades the audio out with a logarithmic curve—quickly rising at the
start and flattening out towards the end.
Exp fades the audio out with an exponential curve—slowly rising in the
beginning and growing steeper towards the end.
The Pitch Shift process changes the pitch of the sample without changing
its length. This lets you set the sample’s pitch to your sequence without
affecting the sample’s tempo or duration. Keep in mind that the audio
quality may decrease at more extreme settings.
Use the Pitch field to shift the pitch up to 12.00 semitones up or down.
The Gain Change process raises or lowers the volume of the sample.
Use the Gain Amount field to adjust the gain up to 18 dB up or down.
This function is different than Normalize because it will allow volumes
beyond clipping level. This may be a desired effect, but remember to
watch your output level!
163
Pad Mixer
In the Pad Mixer, you can set a program’s levels, stereo panning, routing, and effects.
To enter the Pad Mixer, do any of the following:
•
Click the pad-and-sliders icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Pad Mixer.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Pad Mixer.
The Pad Mixer works like an audio mixer with various settings for each pad.
The upper half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
164
The lower half of the window displays channel strips representing the pads of the current program (used by the
currently selected track) used in the current sequence. Each type has a slightly different appearance.
Tip: If you want to see channel strips for both the Channel Mixer and the Pad Mixer at the same time, use the Mixer
Window, which provides an overview of the channel strips in both modes in one screen. See General Features >
Mixer Window to learn about this.
Select a track to view the channel strips for its program and pads. When an audio track or a track using a plugin
program is selected, there will be no pad channel strips. When a track using a MIDI program or CV program is
selected, there will be no pad channel strips or program strips.
Use the buttons in the lower-left corner of this area to show or hide different parts of the channel strips:
Click the box icon to show or hide the Inserts slots on the channel strips.
Click the four-circles icon to show or hide the Send knobs on the channel strips.
Click the pad icon to show or hide the pad on the channel strips for drum programs.
Use the selectors between the upper and lower halves of the window to filter which channel strips are shown or hidden:
Events: When Events is selected, the channel strips that are shown or hidden depend on whether Trk or Seq is
selected next to it:
Trk: When Trk is selected, channel strips whose pads play in the current track will be shown. All others will
be hidden.
Seq: When Seq is selected, channel strips whose pads play in the current sequence (if multiple tracks use
this program) will be shown. All others will be hidden.
Samples: When Samples is selected, only channel strips whose pads or keygroups have samples assigned to
them will be shown. When Samples is deselected, channel strips for all pads or keygroups will be shown.
Program: When Program is selected, the program channel strip will be shown on the right edge of the lower half
of the window. When Program is deselected, the program channel strip will be hidden.
165
When a MIDI track is selected, the pad channel strips or keygroup channel strips for that program are grouped
together on the left. The corresponding program channel strip will appear on the right. (When an audio track or a
track using a plugin program is selected, there will be no pad channel strips. When a track using a MIDI program or
CV program is selected, there will be no pad channel strips or program strips.)
Pad Channel Strip
When a track using a drum program or clip program is selected, the pad channel strip has these controls:
Click a pad channel strip to select it.
The number of the pad is at the bottom of the channel strip. If pads are shown at the bottom of the
channel strips, you can click a pad to select its channel strip and play its sound.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that pad. See General Features >
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about pad insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the pad. See General Features
> Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about pad send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the pad is routed, which you can set to the current
program (Program), a submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out
1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32). Usually, this is set to Program.
Click M or S to mute or solo the pad (respectively).
To change the panning or level of the pad, adjust the pan knob or level slider. The green level
meter next to the slider shows the pad’s current volume level in dB.
Keygroup Channel Strip
When a track using a keygroup program is selected, the keygroup channel strip has these controls:
Click a keygroup channel strip to select it. Alternatively, click the KG menu at the top of the
channel strip and select one—that channel strip will then display that keygroup.
The number of the keygroup is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that keygroup. See General Features
> Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about keygroup insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the keygroup. See General
Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about keygroup send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the keygroup is routed, which you can set to the
current program (Program), a submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output >
Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32). Usually, this is set to Program.
Click M or S to mute or solo the keygroup (respectively).
To change the panning or level of the keygroup, adjust the pan knob or level slider. The green
level meter next to the slider shows the keygroup’s current volume level in dB.
166
Program Channel Strip
When a track using a drum program, keygroup program, plugin program, or clip program is selected,
the program channel strip has these controls:
The name of the program is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu shows the current program (which you can change).
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that program. See General Features >
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about program insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the program. See General
Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about program send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the program is routed, which you can set to a
submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32), or a single
master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the program (respectively).
Click the program automation button to cycle through the three possible states of program
automation:
When off, the program will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override
this and turn it off by pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the
effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not record any additional
automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter automation. (Think of this as a
protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs
assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are
recording.)
See General Features > Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation by clicking the
global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the program.
The green level meter next to the slider shows the program’s current volume level in dB.
167
Audio Track Channel Strip
When an audio track is selected, there will be only an audio track channel strip (instead of a program
channel strip) shown on the right with these controls:
The name of the track is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu defines the input source of the external audio signal, which you can set to a pair of
inputs (Stereo > Input 1,2–31,32) or a single input (Mono > Input 1–32).
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that track. See General Features >
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about audio track insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the track. See General Features
> Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about audio track send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the track is routed, which you can set to a submix
(Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master
output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the track (respectively).
Click the audio track automation button to cycle through the three possible states of audio track
automation:
When off, the audio track will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can override
this and turn it off by pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the
effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the audio track will read automation data but will not record any
additional automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter automation. (Think of this
as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the audio track can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs
assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are
recording.)
See General Features > Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation by clicking the
global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Click the Monitor button to set how your audio track will be monitored. Clicking it will cycle
through its three states:
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
When on, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
When off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the track. The
green level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current volume level in dB.
Click the Record Arm () button to record-enable the track. When you begin audio recording, the
audio signal will be recorded to this track.
Tip: You can record-enable multiple tracks by pressing and holding Ctrl (Windows) or  (macOS)
while clicking the Arm button to each track (in the upper half of the window).
168
Channel Mixer
In the Channel Mixer, you can set levels, stereo panning, and other settings for your tracks, programs,
returns, submixes, and masters.
To open the Channel Mixer, do any of the following:
•
Click the sliders icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Channel Mixer.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Channel Mixer.
The Channel Mixer works like an audio mixer for the currently selected sequence with various settings for each MIDI
track, audio track, program, submix, return, or master output.
169
The upper half of the window displays the Track View. See General Features > Track View to learn more about this.
The lower half of the window displays channel strips representing the MIDI tracks, audio tracks, programs, submixes,
returns, and master outputs used in the current sequence. Each type has a slightly different appearance.
Tip: If you want to see channel strips for both the Channel Mixer and the Pad Mixer at the same time, use the Mixer
Window, which provides an overview of the channel strips in both modes in one screen. See General Features >
Mixer Window to learn about this.
Select a sequence to view its channel strips. There will be no program strips shown for MIDI programs or CV programs,
though channel strips will be shown for any MIDI tracks that use those programs.
Use the buttons in the lower-left corner of this area to show or hide different parts of the channel strips:
Click the box icon to show or hide the Inserts slots on the channel strips.
Click the four-circles icon to show or hide the Send knobs on the channel strips.
Click the menu icon (≡) in the upper-right corner of the channel strips, and select or deselect Show Unused
Programs and/or Show Unused Tracks.
Use the selectors between the upper and lower halves of the window to filter which channel strips are shown or hidden.
When an option is selected, those channel strips will be shown. When it is deselected, its channel strips will be hidden.
MIDI Track
Audio Track
Program
Submix
Return
Master
170
MIDI Track Channel Strip
A MIDI track channel strip has these controls:
The name of the track is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu shows the current program (which you can change).
Click M or S to mute or solo the track (respectively).
To change the panning or level of the track, adjust the pan knob or level slider. The blue
level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current velocity level (0–127).
Audio Track Channel Strip
An audio track channel strip has these controls:
The name of the track is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The first menu defines the input source of the external audio signal, which you can set to a pair
of inputs (Stereo > Input 1,2–31,32) or a single input (Mono > Input 1–32).
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that track. See General Features >
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about audio track insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the track. See General Features
> Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about audio track send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the track is routed, which you can set to a submix
(Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master
output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the track (respectively).
Click the audio track automation button to cycle through the three possible states of audio
track automation:
When off, the audio track will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or
entered automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you
can override this and turn it off by pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the
effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the audio track will read automation data but will not record any
additional automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter automation. (Think of this
as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the audio track can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs
assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are
recording.)
See General Features > Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation by clicking
the global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Click the Monitor button to set how your audio track will be monitored. Clicking it will cycle
through its three states:
When set to Auto, you will hear incoming audio while the track is record-enabled only.
When on, you will hear incoming audio whether or not the track is record-enabled.
When off, you will never hear any incoming audio.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the track. The
green level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current volume level in dB.
Click the Record Arm () button to record-enable the track. When you begin audio recording,
the audio signal will be recorded to this track.
Tip: You can select record-enable multiple tracks by pressing and holding Ctrl (Windows) or 
(macOS) while clicking the Arm button to each track (in the upper half of the window or in the
channel strips).
171
Program Channel Strip
A program channel strip has these controls:
The name of the program is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that program. See General Features
> Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about program insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the program. See General
Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about program send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the program is routed, which you can set to a
submix (Submix > Sub 1–8), a pair of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32), or a
single master output (Mono Output > Out 1–32).
Click M or S to mute or solo the program (respectively).
Click the program automation button to cycle through the three possible states of program
automation:
When off, the program will ignore automation data. If you have already recorded or entered
automation, clicking this will switch between Read (R) and Write (W) only, but you can
override this and turn it off by pressing and holding Shift while clicking the button.
Important: If you have already recorded automation and turn it off, the track will still use the
effect and its parameter values at the point where you turned it off.
When set to Read (R), the program will read automation data but will not record any
additional automation over it. You can still manually edit and enter automation. (Think of this
as a protective feature to prevent accidental changes to your automation while recording.)
When set to Write (W), the program can record automation. (If you have any Q-Link knobs
assigned to automatable parameters, make sure not to touch any accidentally while you are
recording.)
See General Features > Automation to learn about recording and editing automation.
Tip: You can quickly set all programs and audio tracks to the same automation by clicking
the global automation button in the upper-right corner of the window.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the program.
The green level meter next to the slider shows the track’s current volume level in dB.
Submix Channel Strip
A submix channel strip has these controls:
The number of the submix is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that submix. See General Features >
Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about submix insert effects.
Click and drag the Send knobs, which control the send levels for the submix. See General
Features > Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about submix send/return effects.
The menu below the Send knobs shows where the program is routed, which you can set to a pair
of master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32), or a single master output (Mono Output >
Out 1–32).
Click M to mute the submix.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the submix.
The green level meter next to the slider shows the submix’s current volume level in dB.
172
Return Channel Strip
A return channel strip has these controls:
The number of the return is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that return. See General Features >
Effects > Send/Return Effects to learn more about send/return effects.
The menu above the M button shows where the return is routed, which you can set to a pair of
master outputs (Stereo Output > Out 1,2–31,32) or a single master output (Mono Output >
Out 1–32).
Click M to mute the return.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the return.
The green level meter next to the slider shows the return’s current volume level in dB.
Master Channel Strip
A master channel strip has these controls:
The number of the pair of master outputs is at the bottom of the channel strip.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for that pair of outputs. See General
Features > Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about master insert effects.
Click M to mute the outputs.
Adjust the pan knob or level slider to change the panning or level (respectively) of the outputs.
The green level meter next to the slider shows the outputs’ current volume level in dB.
173
Step Sequencer
The Step Sequencer lets you create or edit sequences by using the pads as “step buttons,” simulating the
experience of a traditional step-sequencer-style drum machine.
This is available for MIDI tracks only, not audio tracks.
To enter the Step Sequencer, do any of the following:
•
Click the step-bars icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Step Sequencer.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Step Sequencer.
To enter or delete steps in a sequence:
1. Use the Pad field in the Pads area to select the pad whose steps you want to enter or delete. The current pad
number is shown in the upper-left corner.
2. Use the Bar field in the Pads area to select the bar of the sequence whose steps you want to enter or delete.
The current bar number is shown in the upper-left corner.
3. Click the pads. Each pad corresponds to a step in the bar and will light with a color corresponding to its velocity.
Keep in mind that for time divisions larger than 16, the bar’s steps will be represented by multiple pad banks. In
this case, use Pad Bank Buttons A and B to view all the steps within a bar.
174
The upper half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab to enter the corresponding editor. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, and Project panel. Click the corresponding
selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels to learn more about the Project panel. The QLinks and Pads panels are described below.
Q-Links
The Q-Links panel (when Q-Link Mode is set to Screen) lets you to adjust the
velocity of each step. The number of each step will be shown under the
corresponding Q-Link knob.
Use each Q-Link knob to adjust the velocity (1–127) of its corresponding step.
Setting a value of 0 (Off) will delete the note event from that step. Changing a
velocity from 0 (Off) to a value of 1 or greater will enter a note event at that step.
Pads
The Pads panel lets you quickly create and delete note events as “steps” by using
the pads of your MPC hardware or MPC software, similar to step recording with
drum machines in the 1980s.
Each pad represents a step in the bar. Keep in mind that the total number of steps
depends on the Time Correct setting. For time divisions larger than 16 (e.g., 32),
the bar’s steps will be represented by multiple pad banks. In that case, use the
Pad field to view all the steps within a bar.
Use the Bar field or the arrows ( or ) on either side of it to select the bar whose
steps you want to edit.
Use the Pad Select button to select the pad whose steps you want to edit. Click
Pad Select to activate it, click a pad (the currently selected pad is lit green), and
then click Pad Select again to deactivate it.
Alternatively, click and drag the Pad field up or down. You can also click a pad in
the Grid Editor.
Click an unlit pad to enter a note event at that step. The pad will light up with a
color corresponding to its velocity.
Click a lit pad to delete the note event from that step. The pad will be unlit.
The green pad indicates the current step (playhead position) in the sequence.
175
Sampler
The Sampler lets you record audio samples to use in your projects.
Important: To record any audio, you need to connect an audio source to your MPC hardware or to your
computer’s audio interface.
To open the Sampler, do any of the following:
•
Click the vinyl-and-tonearm icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Sampler.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Sampler.
To set up the Sampler before recording:
1. Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and speakers, headphones, and/or monitors before
you make any connections to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2. Connect a synthesizer or other line-level audio source to the input/inputs of your MPC hardware or external
audio interface.
3. On your MPC hardware or external audio interface, turn the Rec Vol knob to set the input level while playing your
audio source. You should now see the level in the meter. Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the
meter should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. Set the recording controls as desired (described in this chapter).
5. Click the Arm button to record-arm the Sampler.
176
The upper half of the window shows the waveform. Unlike other times the
waveform is shown here, you cannot edit the waveform in this part of the
window; you must use the Wave Editor in Main Mode or Sample Edit Mode
instead.
The timeline provides a reference for the length of the sample. Click the
down arrow () or right-click anywhere on the timeline to select the
increments it will use: Time (secs:ms), Samples, or Beats.
Scroll left or right on the waveform to move through it. Use the sliders in
the lower-right corner or click the timeline and drag down or up to zoom in
or out.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, Sampler panel, and Project panel. Click
the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels > Project to learn more
about the Project panel.
The Pads panel varies based on the four different recording methods: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, or Pad Hold, all
described in this chapter.
Q-Links
In the Q-Links panel:
Use Q-Link Knob 1 to adjust the threshold. This is the same as
adjusting the threshold slider in the Sampler panel.
Use Q-Link Knobs 3 and 4 to define the maximum sampling time. This
is the same as adjusting the Max Length field as shown on your MPC
hardware. You can record up to 19 minutes and 59 seconds (19:59)
per sample. We recommend setting these to values that roughly match
your estimated recording duration.
177
Pads
The Pads panel has three different appearances, depending on the recording method:
Sample Method
Slice Method
Pad Tap & Pad Hold Methods
While using the Sample Method, the Pads panel shows information for each pad, depending on the currently selected
program. This is identical to how the Pads panel appears in Main Mode (see the Main Mode chapter to learn more).
While using the Slice Method, the pads correspond to slices of the currently recorded sample. See Recording
Methods > Slice to learn how to use the Pads panel with this method.
While using the Pad Tap or Pad Hold Methods, clicking a pad or clicking and holding a pad immediately starts or
continues recording directly to that pad. See Recording Methods > Pad Tap or Pad Hold to learn how to use the
Pads panel with those methods.
178
Sampler
The Input Source menu in the upper-left corner of the Sampler panel
defines whether you are going to record an external audio signal (Stereo or
Mono) or an internal signal from within the MPC software (Resample L,
Resample R, or Resample L+R).
Resampling does not require an audio connection because the source is
within the MPC software and is therefore recorded without any loss in
audio quality. You can, for example, use Resample to record two or more
samples by pressing the corresponding pads simultaneously or by simply
playing a sequence.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for the Sampler.
See General Features > Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about
insert effects.
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This
means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later.
Click the Mono/Stereo menu to choose whether your recorded samples
will be monaural (Mono) or binaural (Stereo).
Click the Monitor button to set how the Sampler will be monitored:
When on, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the Sampler, ensuring zero latency.
When off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is processed in the Sampler, so there may
be some latency, but you will hear the audio source as it sounds in the recording.
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of the audio sources.
Use the threshold slider to adjust the threshold. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 1.
When the Sampler is record-armed, it automatically starts recording when the level of the incoming source exceeds
this setting. If you set it too high, the recording may not start when you play the input source, or the start of the
material you wanted to record may be missing. If you set it too low, the recording may start too early, before you play
the external source. Set this parameter to an appropriate level using the level meter.
For reference, the Sample Length counter shows you the length of your sample during the recording procedure.
Click Arm to record-arm the Sampler. The button will then change to Record.
At that point, start recording by doing either of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Click the Record button under the Sample Length counter.
Click the Record Method menu to select the recording method you want to use: Sample, Slice, Pad Tap, or Pad Hold,
all described in the following section.
Click Add Slice as the sample records to insert a slice marker in a sample while recording. Each time you press it, a
slice marker will be placed at that location.
179
Recording Methods
Sample
Using this method, you can insert slice markers directly in your sample as you record it.
Slice markers divide the sample into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in the Chop Mode of
Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode for more information). This is useful when working with a
long sample with different sounds throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To start recording, do one of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Click the Record button under the Sample Length counter.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, click Add Slice as the sample records. Each time you press
it, a slice marker will be placed at that location.
To stop recording, click the Stop button under the Sample Length counter.
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window
will appear.
Use the New Name field to name the new sample. Otherwise, the
process will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
Click the Program menu to assign the new sample to a drum
program. Select <none> if you want to save it to the project
without assigning it to a program.
Use the Assign to Pad field to assign the sample to a pad in
the selected drum program.
Use the Root Note field to set where the sample’s original
pitch will be on the keyboard.
If you recorded a sample while a sequence was playing, the Keep
or Discard Sample window will show a few more options after you
select a pad.
Check the Add Event box to automatically add the sample to
the currently playing sequence.
Use the At menu to select where you want the event to start:
Start: The sample will be a note event at the start of the
currently playing sequence.
Trigger: The sample will be a note event where you began
recording it in the currently playing sequence.
Use the Track field to set which track will contain the new event.
To play the recording, click Play.
To discard the recording and close the window, click Discard.
To confirm your selections, click Keep.
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit
Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
180
Slice
Using this method, the pads correspond to slices of the currently recorded sample. Slice markers divide the sample
into multiple regions called slices, which you can adjust in the Chop Mode of Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit
Mode > Chop Mode for more information). This is useful when working with a long sample with different sounds
throughout (e.g., a drum loop or a long melodic or harmonic passage).
To start recording, do one of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Click the Record button under the Sample Length counter.
To insert a slice marker in a sample while recording, press any pad as the sample records. Each time you press
it, a slice marker will be placed at that location.
The number of the pad that flashes red is the number of the slice marker that will be inserted next. The numbers of
the pads that are lit yellow are the numbers of the slice markers that are already inserted.
When you are done recording, you can name the sample and create a new program using the slices.
To stop recording, click the Stop button under the Sample Length counter.
After you stop your recording, the Keep or Discard Sample window
will appear.
Use the New Name field to name the new sample. Otherwise, the
process will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
Click the Create New Program menu to assign the new sample
to a new program:
Off: No program will be created. The slices will still be
added to your project’s sample pool.
With Non-Destructive Slices: In the new program, each
pad’s Slice setting will be set to the corresponding slice
number. This is identical to how you can assign samples in
Sample Edit Mode (as described in Sample Edit Mode >
Chop Mode).
With Pad Parameters: In the new program, each pad’s
Slice setting will be set to Pad. The Pad Start and Pad
End will be set to the slice’s start point and end point
values, and the Loop Position will be set to the slice’s
start point but with Pad Loop deactivated. This is identical
to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (as
described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode).
To play the recording, click Play.
To discard the recording and return to the Sampler, click Discard.
To confirm your selections, click Keep.
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit
Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
181
Pad Tap
Important: This mode works for drum programs only; you must select a drum program before using this mode.
Otherwise, this feature will not do anything, even though it may appear to work.
With this method, clicking or pressing a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad (make sure
you are using the desired program before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright yellow.
Pads without samples are lit dim yellow.
To start recording to a pad, click or press it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will flash red. If you click
or press a new pad, the recording will stop on the previous pad, which will turn green, and start on the new pad,
which will flash red.
Note: If you start recording by clicking Record under the Sample Length counter—or if the volume exceeds the
level of the threshold slider—the sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording to a pad, click or press the currently recording pad, which is flashing red. The sample will
continue recording. You can start recording on another pad at any time.
To stop all recording, click the Stop button under the Sample Length counter.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have clicked or pressed during recording:
•
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
•
will have its Pad Start and Pad End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
•
will have its Loop Position set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
Pad Hold
Important: This mode works for drum programs only; you must select a drum program before using this mode.
Otherwise, this feature will not do anything, even though it may appear to work.
With this method, clicking or pressing and holding a pad immediately starts or continues recording directly to that pad
(make sure you are using the desired program before you start recording). Pads with assigned samples are lit bright
yellow. Pads without samples are lit dim yellow.
To start recording to a pad, click and hold it, or press and hold it. Recording will start immediately, and the pad will
light red.
Note: If you start recording by clicking Record under the Sample Length counter—or if the volume exceeds the
level of the threshold slider—the sample will record to your project’s sample pool, not to a pad.
To stop recording, release the pad. The pad will light green, and the sample will continue recording. You can start
recording on another pad at any time.
To stop all recording, click the Stop button under the Sample Length counter.
When you are done recording, each pad that you have clicked or pressed during recording:
•
will have its Slice setting set to Pad;
•
will have its Pad Start and Pad End set to the slice’s start point and end point values; and
•
will have its Loop Position set to the slice’s start point but with Pad Loop deactivated.
This is identical to how you can assign samples in Sample Edit Mode (described in Sample Edit Mode > Chop Mode).
Tip: We recommend editing your recorded sample in Sample Edit Mode (see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
182
Looper
The Looper lets you record and overdub audio in real time—a great tool for live performance as well as
spontaneous moments in the studio. You can export the loop as a sample to use in your project.
To open the Looper, do any of the following:
•
Click the loop-and-waveform icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Looper.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Looper.
183
Below is a brief step-by-step process so you can get started quickly. Continue reading the rest of this chapter to
learn how to use the Looper in different cases.
To get started using the Looper:
1. Make sure to reduce the volume levels of your audio source and
speakers/headphones/monitors before you make any connections
to avoid “pops” or feedback.
2. Connect a synthesizer, audio player, etc. to the input/inputs of
your MPC hardware or external audio interface.
3. On your MPC hardware or external audio interface, turn the Rec
Vol knob to set the input level while playing your audio source.
You should now see the level in the meter in the Looper panel.
Make sure it does not exceed the maximum level (the meter
should not be “peaking” constantly).
4. In the Looper panel, set the recording controls as desired
(described later in this chapter).
5. Click the Record To menu in the Looper panel and select Overdub.
6. Click the Ovr (⊕) button in the Looper panel to record-arm the
Looper.
7. Play your audio source. The Looper will start recording immediately
when the input level reaches the threshold value. Alternatively, click
Play () in the Looper panel to manually start recording.
Each time the Looper repeats, its contents are being overdubbed—
a new layer of audio will be added each time you let the Looper
repeat as it records.
Tip: You can record a loop while playing a sequence in the
background for reference.
8. To stop recording, click Play () in the Looper panel.
To export your loop as a sample, click Export to open the
Export Loop as Sample window.
To clear the contents of the Looper, click Clear.
184
The upper half of the window shows the real-time waveform of the Looper’s audio. Unlike other times the waveform
is shown here, you cannot edit the waveform in this part of the window.
The audio playhead indicates the Looper’s current playback and/or recording position.
The timeline provides a reference for the length of the sample as bars.beats.ticks.
The lower half of the window can display the Q-Links panel, Pads panel, Looper panel, and Project panel. Click the
corresponding selector to show or hide each one.
The Pads panel shows information for each pad, depending on the currently selected program. This is identical to
how the Pads panel appears in Main Mode (see the Main Mode chapter to learn more).
See General Features > Panels > Project to learn more about the Project panel.
The Q-Links panel and Looper panel are described in the following sections.
Q-Links
In the Q-Links panel:
Use Q-Link Knob 1 to adjust the threshold. This is the same as
adjusting the threshold slider in the Looper panel.
Use Q-Link Knob 4 to adjust the Looper’s output gain level. This is the
same as adjusting the Output Gain slider in the Looper panel.
185
Looper
The Input Source menu in the upper-left corner of the Looper panel
defines whether you are going to record an external audio signal (Stereo or
Mono) or an internal signal from within the MPC software (Resample L,
Resample R, or Resample L+R).
Resampling does not require an audio connection because the source is
within the MPC software and is therefore recorded without any loss in
audio quality. You can, for example, use Resample to record two or more
samples by pressing the corresponding pads simultaneously or by simply
playing a sequence.
The Inserts slots show any enabled or disabled effects for the Looper. See
General Features > Effects > Insert Effects to learn more about insert
effects.
Important: These effects are applied to the audio as you record it. This
means that the effects cannot be “removed” from the sound later.
Click the Mono/Stereo menu to choose whether your recorded loop will
be monaural (Mono) or binaural (Stereo).
Click the Monitor button to set how the Looper will be monitored:
When on, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken before it reaches the Sampler, ensuring zero latency.
When off, the audio you hear in your headphones will be taken after it is processed in the Sampler, so there may
be some latency, but you will hear the audio source as it sounds in the recording.
Tip: To avoid possible clicks or feedback while input monitoring, reduce the level of the audio sources.
Use the threshold slider to adjust the threshold. Alternatively, turn Q-Link Knob 1.
When the Looper is record-armed, it automatically starts recording when the level of the incoming source exceeds
this setting. If you set it too high, the recording may not start when you play the input source, or the start of the
material you wanted to record may be missing. If you set it too low, the recording may start too early, before you play
the external source. Set this parameter to an appropriate level using the level meter.
Click Rplc or Ovr (⊕) to record-arm the Looper. The Play () and Ovr (⊕) buttons will then flash.
At that point, start recording by doing either of the following:
•
Start performing so that the incoming audio level exceeds the level of the threshold slider.
•
Click the Play () button in the Looper panel.
Click Rev () to reverse playback and recording of the Looper.
Use the Bars field to define the length of your loop. Regardless of how much or how little audio you record, this is
how long your loop will be.
Click Sync button to sync or un-sync the looper with sequence playback. When on, the Looper will stay in step with your
current sequence. When you play or record into the Looper, it will wait until the sequence starts playing Bar 1 to start.
186
Use the Record To selector to determine the loop recording behavior:
Play: Before recording, you must first click the Play () button on the window, which will start playing the Looper.
Overdub: Before recording, you must first click Rplc or Ovr (⊕) to record-arm the Looper.
Click Clear  to erase the loop immediately.
Click Export  to open the Export Loop as a Sample window.
Use the Output Gain slider to adjust the Looper’s output gain level. This is the same as adjusting Q-Link Knob 4 in
the Q-Links panel.
Below are step-by-step instructions for using the Looper’s functions.
To record with the Looper:
Important:
To record without erasing any audio you’ve already recorded in the loop, use the ⊕/Ovr button.
To overwrite the audio you’ve already recorded, use the Rplc button.
If Record To is set to Play:
To start recording, click the Rplc or Ovr (⊕) button as the loop is playing. The Looper will start recording
immediately.
To stop recording, click the Rplc or Ovr (⊕) button. The Looper will stop recording but continue playing.
To stop playback and recording, click the Play () button.
If Record To is set to Overdub:
To start recording, click the Play () button on the window.
If Sync is off, you can also play your audio source so that the input level reaches the threshold value.
If Sync is on, you can also click the Play () or Play Start (|) button in the toolbar to start playing a
sequence; recording will start when the sequence starts on Bar 1.
To stop recording, click the Ovr (⊕) button. The Looper will stop recording but continue playing.
To stop playback and recording, click the Play () button, or press stop to stop sequence playback.
To play or stop the loop (without recording), click the Play () button on the window.
To reverse loop playback, click the Rev () button. If Seq Sync is on, playback will reverse once the Looper’s
playhead reaches the end of the loop. If If Seq Sync is off, playback will reverse immediately.
To erase the loop immediately, click Clear .
187
To export the loop as a sample:
1. Click Export  to open the Export Loop as a Sample window.
2. Use the New Name field to name the new sample. Otherwise, the
process will add a consecutive number after the sample name.
3. Optional: Click the Program menu to assign the new sample
to a program. Select <none> if you want to save it to the
project without assigning it to a program.
4. Optional: Use the Assign to Pad field to assign the sample to
a pad in the program.
5. Use the Root Note field to set where the sample’s original
pitch will be on the keyboard.
To play the recording, click Play.
To close the window without exporting, click Cancel.
To confirm your selections and export the loop, click Do It.
Tip: We recommend editing your sample in Sample Edit Mode
(see Sample Edit Mode for more information).
188
Pad Mute Mode
Pad Mute Mode lets you easily mute pads within a program or set mute groups for each pad within a program.
To enter Pad Mute Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the square-and-X icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Pad Mute.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Pad Mute.
While Pad Mute is selected in the Mute panel, you can mute or unmute individual sounds (on a single track) in real
time by pressing the pads. This is useful if you want to hear a track without a particular sound or if you want to
isolate specific sounds or combinations of sounds.
Tip: This function is similar to muting pads one at a time in the grid but more convenient.
The Pad Group feature in the Mute panel extends the concept of pad mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple pads
(on a single track) by pressing one pad that you have assigned to a group. This is useful if you want to hear a track
without a particular group of sounds or if you want to isolate specific sounds in various combinations. You can create
up to 16 different groups.
The upper half of the window can display the Grid Editor, Wave Editor, or List Editor. Click the Grid, Wave, or List
tab to enter the corresponding editor. See General Features > Editors to learn more about each one.
The lower half of the window can display the Pad Banks panel, Pads panel, Mute panel, and Project panel. Click
the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels > Project to learn more
about the Project panel. The other panels are described below: Pad Banks, Pads, and Mute.
189
Pad Banks
The Pad Banks panel is an overview of all pads
in all eight pad banks.
Click a pad bank to select it. That bank will also
appear in the Grid Editor and the Pads panel.
While using the Pad Mute function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad with a sample to
mute or unmute it. Muted pads are red. Unmuted
pads are yellow.
While using the Pad Group function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad to select it to assign
to a group. The selected pad is green. Pads that
belong to the same group flash yellow.
Pads
The Pads panel represents the pads in the current
bank. If a pad is assigned to a group, the group
number will appear at the bottom of the pad.
Click a pad bank to select it. That bank will also
appear in the Grid Editor and the Pad Banks panel.
While using the Pad Mute function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad with a sample to
mute or unmute it. Muted pads are red. Unmuted
pads are yellow.
While using the Pad Group function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad to select it to assign
to a group. The selected pad is green. Pads that
belong to the same group flash yellow.
Mute
The Mute panel lets you configure how pad mutes
work.
Click Pad Mute to use Pad Mute Mode normally.
Clicking or pressing a pad will mute or unmute it
(and any pads in the same group).
Click Pad Group to assign pads to groups.
Clicking or pressing a pad will select it.
Click the Time Correct menu to select a time
division to quantize pad mutes in this mode. For
example, while set to 1 Bar, your mutes will
always align with the beginning of the measure
immediately after you press the pad. Select Off
to deactivate this feature.
While Pad Group is selected, click the Pad menu
to assign the currently selected pad to a group.
Select Group Off to un-assign the pad from any
group.
190
Track Mute Mode
Track Mute Mode lets you easily mute MIDI tracks within a sequence or set track groups, enabling you to
mute multiple tracks at once.
Important: Track Mute Mode applies to MIDI tracks only—not audio tracks.
To enter Track Mute Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the bars-and-X icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Track Mute.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Track Mute.
While Track Mute is selected in the Mute panel, you can mute, unmute, or solo MIDI tracks (in a single sequence) in
real time by pressing the pads. This is useful if you want to hear a sequence without a particular MIDI track (e.g.,
muting your keyboard track to focus on the bass) or if you want to isolate specific sounds or combinations of sounds
that are separated by track.
Tip: This function is similar to, but more convenient than, muting MIDI tracks one at a time in the Track View.
The Track Group feature in the Mute panel extends the concept of track mutes: you can mute or unmute multiple
MIDI tracks (in a single sequence) by pressing one pad that you have assigned to a track group. This is useful if you
want to hear a track without a particular group of sounds or if you want to isolate specific sounds in various
combinations. You can create up to 16 different track groups.
191
The upper half of the window displays the Track View. See General Features > Track View to learn more about this.
The lower half of the window can display the Pad Banks panel, Pads panel, Mute panel, and Project panel. Click
the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels > Project to learn more
about the Project panel. The other panels are described below: Pad Banks, Pads, and Mute.
Pad Banks
The Pad Banks panel is an overview of all pads
in all eight pad banks. Each pad represents a
MIDI track in the current sequence.
Click a pad bank to select it.
While using the Track Mute function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad to mute or unmute
its track. Pads with muted tracks are red. Pads
with unmuted tracks are yellow.
While using the Track Group function (selected
in the Mute panel), click a pad to select its track
to assign to a group. The pad with the selected
track is green. Pads with tracks that belong to
the same group flash yellow.
While using the Solo function (selected in the
Mute panel), click a pad to solo its track (muting
all others). The pad with the soloed track is
green. The colors of other pads will not change
when using this feature.
Pads
The Pads panel represents 16 MIDI tracks (per
bank) in the current sequence. If a pad’s track is
assigned to a group, the group number will
appear at the bottom of the pad.
Click a pad bank to select it.
While using the Track Mute function (selected in
the Mute panel), click a pad to mute or unmute
its track. Pads with muted tracks are red. Pads
with unmuted tracks are yellow.
While using the Track Group function (selected
in the Mute panel), click a pad to select its track
to assign to a group. The pad with the selected
track is green. Pads with tracks that belong to
the same group flash yellow.
While using the Solo function (selected in the
Mute panel), click a pad to solo its track (muting
all others). The pad with the soloed track is
green. The colors of other pads will not change
when using this feature.
192
Mute
The Mute panel lets you configure how track mutes work.
Click Track Mute to use Track Mute Mode normally. Clicking or
pressing a pad will mute or unmute its track (and any tracks in
the same group).
Click Track Group to assign tracks to groups. Clicking or
pressing a pad will select its track.
Click the Time Correct menu to select a time division to quantize
track mutes in this mode. For example, while set to 1 Bar, your
mutes will always align with the beginning of the measure
immediately after you press the pad. Select Off to deactivate this
feature.
While Track Group is selected, click the Track menu to assign
the track of the currently selected pad to a group. Select Group
Off to un-assign the track from any group.
Click Solo to enable or disable the solo feature. When enabled,
click a pad to solo its track (muting all others).
193
Next Sequence Mode
Next Sequence Mode lets you trigger different sequences simply by playing the pads. This is useful for live
performances, letting you change a song’s structure in real time.
To enter Next Sequence Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the double-arrow icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Next Sequence.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Next Sequence.
In Next Sequence Mode, every pad is assigned to a sequence, starting from Pad A01 with Sequence 1 and
ascending from there.
In this mode, you can start playback and choose the sequence that plays next in real time. Select the next sequence
by pressing its corresponding pad. Alternatively, allow the current sequence to repeat indefinitely. When you stop
playback, you can copy the order of sequences you played into Song Mode to export it.
194
The upper half of the window displays a representation of the sequences that have played.
The dark blue timeline at the top indicates the number of bars that have elapsed with each sequence. The white
arrow () is the audio playhead, indicating the current playback position.
Each block represents a sequence with miniature track note events. The sequence number and name is at the top of
each block. A repeat symbol (||:) next to the sequence name indicates it is a repeat of the previous sequence.
Use the sliders in the lower-right corner of this area (along each axis) to zoom in or zoom out.
The lower half of the window can display the Sequence List panel, Pads panel, Performance Controls panel, and
Project panel. Click the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels >
Project to learn more about the Project panel. The other panels are described below: Sequence List, Pads, and
Performance Controls.
Sequence List
The Sequence List panel shows a list of all available sequences in your project
as well as their length and tempo. The currently selected one is highlighted.
Select one by clicking or pressing its corresponding pad.
The Sequence column shows the name of the sequence.
The Length column indicates the length of the sequence in bars.
The Tempo column indicates the tempo of the sequence in BPM. Keep in
mind that each sequence will not play back at this tempo if the Seq/Mst
button in the toolbar is set to Mst; if it is set to Seq, then each sequence
follows its own tempo during playback.
Note: To set the BPM of a sequence, select that sequence and then use
(A) the BPM field in its Sequence section of the Inspector or (B) the BPM
field in the toolbar (when set to Seq instead of Mst).
195
Pads
The Pads panel represents 16 sequences (per bank). Each pad shows the
length of the sequence in bars, the tempo of the sequence in BPM, and the
name of the sequence. (Keep in mind that each sequence will not play back at
this tempo if the Seq/Mst button in the toolbar is set to Mst; if it is set to Seq,
then each sequence follows its own tempo during playback.)
Click a pad bank to select it.
Click a pad to select its sequence.
If a sequence on another pad will play next, that pad will flash green.
During playback, the pad with the currently playing sequence will be lit green.
Performance Controls
The Performance Controls panel shows the available commands you can execute.
As a sequence plays, you can use the buttons in this panel to change how
playback works in this mode:
Click Hold to repeat the current sequence indefinitely and temporarily
ignore pad presses. Click it again to return to normal operation. This is
useful if you want to select other pads without selecting them to play next.
Click Sudden to switch to the currently selected sequence immediately.
The new sequence will start playing whether or not the current sequence is
done. This is useful in live performances if you need to switch to the next
sequence instantly at a certain cue.
Click Next Bar to switch to the currently selected sequence at the
beginning of the next bar. This is useful if you want to switch to another
sequence before the current one ends without having to worry about timing
issues.
If there is a sequence that will play next, you can click Clear to cancel it.
The current sequence will continue playing or you can click or press a pad
to select another sequence to play next. This option is available only if that
sequence is not playing at that moment.
While playback is stopped, you can use these buttons:
While playback is stopped, click Copy to Song to copy the sequence playlist
to a song (see the Song Mode chapter to learn about creating a song).
While playback is stopped, click Erase Song to clear all sequences from
the upper half of the window.
196
Song Mode
Song Mode lets you arrange sequences in a specific order and/or repetition to create songs. You can edit
the structure of a song during playback for easy, on-the-fly composing.
A project can contain up to 32 songs, each consisting of up to 999 “steps.” Each step can have an assigned
sequence as well as the number of times that sequence will repeat.
To open Song Mode, do any of the following:
• Click the musical-notes icon in the toolbar (if shown).
• Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click Song.
• Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click Song.
Important: If a sequence is currently playing, stop playback before entering Song Mode. You cannot enter Song
Mode during playback.
In Song Mode, every pad is assigned to a sequence, starting from Pad A01 with Sequence 1 and ascending from there.
In this mode, you can create a song as a list “steps.” Each step corresponds to a sequence and will play a certain
number of times.
Important: When creating a song, the program used by each track in the song’s first sequence will be used by all
subsequent tracks. In other words, all identically numbered tracks (across sequences) will use the program used by
the first sequence in the song—regardless of what programs each track uses while not in Song Mode.
For example, if you create a project in this way…:
• Track 1 of Sequence 1 uses a drum program.
• Track 1 of Sequence 2 uses a keygroup program.
• A song uses Sequence 1 as its first sequence and then uses Sequence 2 any time after it.
…then, in that song, Track 1 in Sequence 2 will use the same drum program as Track 1, Sequence 1.
Because of this, we recommend trying to be consistent while creating tracks in sequences that you intend to use in a
single song. Remember that you can copy one track to another if you ever need to reorder the tracks of a sequence
(see General Features > Editing Processes to learn about this).
197
The upper half of the window displays a representation of the sequences in the song.
The dark blue timeline at the top indicates the number of bars that have elapsed with each sequence. The white
arrow () is the audio playhead, indicating the current playback position.
Each block represents a sequence with miniature track note events. The sequence number and name is at the top of
each block. A repeat symbol (||:) next to the sequence name indicates it is a repeat of the previous sequence.
Click the blue bar at the top of each block to select that step in the song. The bar will be yellow when selected.
If the step contains repetitions of a sequence, all repetitions in that step will be selected.
Click the X in the blue bar at the top of a block to delete that step in the song. If the step contains repetitions of
a sequence, all repetitions in that step will be deleted.
Use the sliders in the lower-right corner of this area (along each axis) to zoom in or zoom out.
The lower half of the window can display the Sequence List panel, Pads panel, Song Parameters panel, and
Project panel. Click the corresponding selector to show or hide each one. See General Features > Panels >
Project to learn more about the Project panel. The other panels are described below: Sequence List, Pads, and
Song Parameters.
198
Sequence List
The Sequence List panel shows a list of the steps of the song. Each step can
have one sequence assigned to it and will show its information. The currently
selected one is highlighted. Select one by clicking it.
The Step column shows the number of the step. Each song can contain up
to 999 steps.
The Sequence column shows the number and name of the assigned
sequence. Click this menu to select a different sequence. This is the same
as the Step menu in the Song Parameters panel.
The Rpts column indicates how many times the sequence plays. Click and
drag this field up or down to set the number of repeats. Each step can play
up to 999 times. You can set it to Hld (the lowest/minimum value) to set the
sequence to repeat indefinitely until you stop playback.
The BPM column indicates the tempo of the sequence in BPM. Keep in
mind that each sequence will not play back at this tempo if the Seq/Mst
button in the toolbar is set to Mst; if it is set to Seq, then each sequence
follows its own tempo during playback.
Note: To set the BPM of a sequence, select that sequence and then use
(A) the BPM field in its Sequence section of the Inspector or (B) the BPM
field in the toolbar (when set to Seq instead of Mst).
The Bars column indicates the length of the sequence in bars.
Pads
The Pads panel represents 16 sequences (per bank). Each pad shows the
length of the sequence in bars, the tempo of the sequence in BPM, and the
name of the sequence. (Keep in mind that each sequence will not play back at
this tempo if the Seq/Mst button in the toolbar is set to Mst; if it is set to Seq,
then each sequence follows its own tempo during playback.)
The pad whose sequence is assigned to the currently selected step will flash
green.
Click a pad bank to select it.
Click and drag a pad onto one of the following locations to use it in the song:
•
onto a step in the Sequence List panel or onto a block in the upper
half of the window. This will replace its currently assigned sequence
with the one you clicked and dragged onto it.
•
between two steps in the Sequence List panel or between two
blocks in the upper half of the window. This will insert a step at that
location and assign the sequence to it.
If a sequence on another pad will play next, that pad will flash yellow.
During playback, the pad with the currently playing sequence will be lit green.
199
Song Parameters
The Song Parameters panel shows the available controls for Song
Mode. You can use the buttons in this panel to edit the song.
Click the Song menu to select the song you want to show.
Double-click the name in this menu to rename the song.
Click Convert > Seq to open the Convert Song window. In this window:
Click the To Sequence menu to select the sequence that will use
the converted song.
Click the Track Status menu to select how you want to convert
muted tracks. Select Include Muted Tracks if you want muted
tracks to be included in the converted song. Select Ignore Muted
Tracks if you want muted tracks to be excluded from the
converted song.
Click Do It to convert the song to that sequence, or click Close to
close the window without converting.
Click Clear to clear the entire sequence playlist (delete all steps) and
the name of the song.
Click Insert Step to insert a step after the currently selected one.
Click Delete Step to delete the currently selected step.
The Step menu shows the number and name of the sequence
assigned to the currently selected step. Click this menu to select a
different sequence. This is the same as the Sequence menu/column
in the Sequence List panel.
The First Bar and Last Bar values indicate the numbers of the bars
(in the entire song) where the step starts and ends, respectively.
The Total Bars value indicates the length of the sequence in bars.
The Repeats value indicates how many times the sequence plays.
Click and drag the Rpts field in the Sequence List panel up or
down to set the number of repeats. Each step can play up to 999
times. When this is set to Hold (the lowest/minimum value), the
sequence to repeat indefinitely until you stop playback.
The Time Sig value indicates the time signature of the sequence.
The BPM value indicates the tempo of the sequence assigned to
the currently selected step in BPM. Keep in mind that each
sequence will not play back at this tempo if the Seq/Mst button in
the toolbar is set to Mst; if it is set to Seq, then each sequence
follows its own tempo during playback.
To render/export your song as an audio file, click the menu icon (≡),
and go to File > Export and click As Audio Mixdown. See General
Features > Audio Mixdown to learn how to use this screen to export
your song.
200
MIDI Control Mode
You can use MIDI Control Mode to customize what MIDI messages are sent from certain controls on your
MPC hardware. This custom “control map” will then work whenever you are in MIDI Control Mode. The edits
you make in MIDI Control Mode will be retained with the current MPC project.
This is helpful when using the MPC software as a plugin: you can use MIDI Control Mode to use your MPC
hardware to control your host software, and then switch back to any other mode to control the MPC plugin.
To enter MIDI Control Mode, do any of the following:
•
Click the MIDI-jack icon in the toolbar (if shown).
•
Click the down arrow () next to the other mode icons in the toolbar, and click MIDI Control.
•
Click the menu icon (≡), and go to View > Mode and click MIDI Control.
Important: Make sure your MPC hardware is connected to your computer and powered on. MIDI Control Mode is
not functional without a connected MPC hardware unit.
In the window, use the following fields and selectors to set each control’s parameters to your preference. The
available parameters depend on its type: Pads, Buttons, Q-Link Knobs, and XY Pad. When you have set all of the
parameters as desired, you can select another control or enter another mode.
The software window will also display a graphical representation of your MPC hardware. Editable controls show their
current MIDI message. Pads and Q-Link knobs show their current MIDI channels.
201
To select a control to edit, do one of the following:
•
Press or turn it on your MPC hardware.
•
Click it on the graphical representation of your MPC hardware.
•
Click the Control menu in the upper-left corner of the window and select one.
Note: The Control menu may show many more hardware controls than are actually available on your MPC hardware.
This is because the list includes all possible controls from all current MPC models (MPC Renaissance, MPC Studio,
MPC Touch, etc.).
Pads
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each pad:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Pad 1–Pad 16). Click
this menu to select another control.
Bank: This is the pad bank of the current pad (A–H). If you select the Set All box, the
pad’s messages and parameters will be identical across all eight banks. Click this
menu to select another bank.
Set All: Click this box to select or deselect it. When selected, the pad’s messages and
parameters will be identical across all eight banks. When deselected, the pad’s
messages and parameters will apply to the current pad only.
Light LED: This determines how the pad’s LEDs will behave. Click this menu to select
an option:
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI
message that matches the pad.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you press the pad and/or MIDI
input is received.
MIDI Ch: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the pad will use to send its
message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the pad will send to
the software when you press it.
Velocity: This determines whether the pad will be velocity-sensitive (On) or not (Off).
When set to Off, pressing the pad will send a note at full-level (127) always.
Aftertouch: This determines how the pad’s aftertouch (pressure applied to the pad
after the initial press) behaves.
Off: The pad will not send any aftertouch messages.
Channel: If you press multiple pads that have this setting, the aftertouch messages
they send will be identical.
Poly: If you press multiple pads, the aftertouch message each pad sends will be
independent from the others.
202
Buttons
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each button:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Erase, Tap Tempo,
Undo, Copy, etc.). Click this menu to select another option.
Light LED: This determines how the button’s LED/LEDs will behave. Click this menu to
select an option:
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI
message that matches the button.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you press the button and/or MIDI
input is received.
MIDI Ch: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the button will use to send its
message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI control change number the button will send to
the software.
Type: This determines whether the button will behave as a Momentary switch or
Toggle (latching) switch.
Q-Link Knobs
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each Q-Link knob:
Control: This is the hardware control you are currently editing (Q-Link 1–16). Click this
menu to select another option.
Light LED: Although you can edit this parameter, it does not actually have a function
on your MPC hardware. Click this menu to select an option:
When set to Never, the LEDs will always be off.
When set to MIDI Input, the LEDs will light up when the software receives a MIDI
message that matches the Q-Link knob.
When set to Local, the LEDs will light up when you touch or turn the Q-Link knob
and/or MIDI input is received.
MIDI Ch: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the Q-Link knob will use to send
its message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the Q-Link knob will
send to the software.
Mode: This determines how the Q-Link knob will control its parameter.
Absolute: The Q-Link knob’s current position determines its parameter’s value;
moving it may cause its parameter to “snap” to a new position if you’re using it to
control different parameters in different modes.
Relative: Moving the Q-Link knob will increase or decrease its parameter
regardless of its physical position.
Low Range: This is the Q-Link knob’s lowest possible value (0–127).
High Range: This is the Q-Link knob’s highest possible value (0–127).
Touch Sense: This activates or deactivates the Q-Link knob’s touch-capacitive circuitry.
On: You can touch the Q-Link knob to send a Note On message to the software
(this is how your MPC hardware normally works).
Off: The Q-Link knob will not send any Note On messages; it will only send CC
messages when you turn it.
Touch Note: This is the MIDI note number the Q-Link knob will send to the software
when you touch it (0–127 or C-2 to G8). Touch Sense must be set to On for this to work.
203
XY Pad
These are the MIDI parameters you can edit for each axis of the XY pad of an MPC X, MPC
Live, or MPC Touch:
Control: This is the axis you are currently editing (XYFX X-Axis or XYFX Y-Axis).
Mute: This button determines whether the axis is muted or not. When muted, its MIDI
output is disabled. You must be viewing the Settings to do this.
MIDI Ch: This determines which MIDI channel (1–16) the axis will use to send its
message to the software.
CC Number: This determines what MIDI Control Change number the axis will send to
the software.
Low Range: This is the axis’s lowest possible value (0–127).
High Range: This is the axis’s highest possible value (0–127).
204
Appendix
Effects & Parameters
This chapter lists the available effects and their parameters. To learn more about how effects work in general in the
MPC software, please see Operation > General Features > Effects.
Note: Some of these effects have a “sync” version (e.g., Flanger Sync, Autopan Sync, etc.) whose rates will be
affected by the current tempo. While viewing the rate of these effects, a “.” next to the time division indicates a
triplet-based rate.
Reverbs
Options: Reverb Small, Reverb Medium, Reverb Large, Reverb Large 2, Reverb In Gate, Reverb Out Gate
Reverb Small
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a small room.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
50
Lo-Cut
0–100
15
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
50
Lo-Cut
0–100
15
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Reverb Medium
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate a medium room.
205
Reverb Large
This is a spatial effect, designed to emulate the sound of a
large hall.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Pre-Delay
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Gate In
0–100
0
Reverb Large 2
This is a less CPU-intensive spatial effect, emulating the
sound of a large hall.
Reverb In Gate
This is a hall reverb with an additional control. The reverb
effect is cut off when the input drops below the level set in
the Gate In parameter.
206
Reverb Out Gate
This is a hall reverb that has an additional control. The reverb Parameter
effect is cut off when the output drops below the level set in
Dry/Wet
the Gate Out parameter.
Pre-Delay
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
1–100
50
Early Reflection
0–100
50
Density
0–100
50
Diffuse
0–100
50
Decay
0–100
75
Lo-Cut
0–100
10
Hi-Cut
0–100
10
Gate Out
0–100
0
Delays
Delays the original signal for a specified period of time and plays it back over an adjustable period of time.
Options: Delay Mono, Delay Mono Sync, Delay Stereo, Delay Sync (Stereo), Delay LP, Delay HP, Delay Analog,
Delay Analog Sync, Delay Tape Sync, Delay Ping Pong, Delay Multi-Tap
Delay Mono
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Delay Mono Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Delay Stereo
Stereo Delay operates similarly to Mono Delay but in true
stereo.
207
Delay Sync (Stereo)
Stereo Delay operates similarly to Mono Delay but in true
stereo.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
500
Feedback
0–100
50
Cutoff
0–100
50
Resonance
0–100
20
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
50
Cutoff
0–100
33
Resonance
0–100
33
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
2–2000 ms
100
0–100
25
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Delay LP
LP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant low-pass filter in the delay line.
Delay HP
HP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay, but it uses a
resonant high-pass filter in the delay line.
Delay Analog
Analog Delay is similar to the Mono Delay, except that it’s
Parameter
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
Dry/Wet
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Time
Feedback
Delay Analog Sync
Analog Delay is similar to Mono Delay, except that it’s
Parameter
designed to emulate an analog “Bucket Brigade”-style delay.
Dry/Wet
This delay has a unique character to it that gives a warmer
sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing.
Time
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Ramp
0–100
50
208
Delay Tape Sync
Tape Delay emulates a delay system using an analog tape
Parameter
loop and a series of tape heads to produce an echo effect.
This delay type yields a very distinct echo sound often heard Dry/Wet
in reggae and dub-style music.
Time
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
1 bar – 1/16 triplets 1/4
Feedback
0–100
50
Ramp
0–100
50
Head 1
0–100
100
Head 2
0–100
0
Head 3
0–100
0
Head 4
0–100
0
Tone
0–100
50
Spread
0–100
50
Wow & Flutter
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time, Left
2–2000 ms
100
Time, Right
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Damping
0–100
100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
50
Time 1
2–2000 ms
100
Time 2
2–2000 ms
100
Time 3
2–2000 ms
100
Feedback
0–100
25
Pan 1
0–100
50
Pan 2
0–100
50
Pan 3
0–100
50
Damping
0–100
100
Gain 1
0–100
25
Gain 2
0–100
25
Gain 3
0–100
25
Delay Ping Pong
This stereo delay allows you to set different delay times for
its left and right repeats.
Delay Multi-Tap
This delay is a mono delay which has three delay generators
with independently adjustable delay times and stereo
position.
209
Flangers
A flanger is a modulated delay to emulate the sound created when running two analog tape machines in parallel with
a slight time disalignment. Slow Rate settings can produce a “whooshing” jet engine sound, while faster rates result
in more of a “warble.”
Options: Flanger, Flanger Sync
Flanger
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Feedback
-100 – 100
0
Delay
0–100
20
Width
0–100
80
Flanger Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
8 bars – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Feedback
-100 – 100
0
Delay
0–100
20
Width
0–100
80
Choruses
A chorus effect uses an LFO to modulate the pitch and a delay of the input signal, which are then added to the dry
signal. In small amounts, this creates the illusion of multiple voices playing at once. Turn up the Feedback and
Depth for more pronounced “shimmering” and “watery” sounds.
Options: Chorus 2-Voice, Chorus 4-Voice
Chorus 2-Voice
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Delay
0–100
20
Amount
0–100
80
Width
0–100
80
Feedback
0–100
50
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Delay
0–100
20
Amount
0–100
80
Width
0–100
80
Feedback
0–100
50
Rate
0–100
10
Chorus 4-Voice
210
Autopans
This effect uses an LFO to move the incoming signal back and forth across the stereo field, creating a rotary effect.
Options: Autopan, Autopan Sync
Autopan
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Autopan Sync
Tremolos
This effect uses an LFO to increase and decrease the volume of the signal. Depending on the LFO shape, this can
produce a smooth wave effect (sine wave) or a stuttering “on-off” effect (square wave).
Options: Tremolo, Tremolo Sync
Tremolo
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
Tremolo Sync
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
1 bar – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Sine to Square 0–100 (sine–square) 0
211
Phasers
The phaser is a classic effect, created by multiple ganged all-pass filters to create “notches,” or sharp spikes, in the
frequency spectrum. The frequencies of these all-pass filters are usually modulated by an LFO to create a sweeping
sound.
Options: Phaser 1, Phaser 2, Phaser Sync
Phaser 1
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
1 bar – 1/16 triplets
1/4
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Frequency
10–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Phaser 2
Phaser Sync
HP (High-Pass) Filters
Options: HP Filter, HP Filter Sweep, HP Filter Sync, HP Shelving Filter
HP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
HP Filter Sweep
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
80
Low Frequency 0–100
50
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
33
Rate
0–100
10
212
HP Filter Sync
This effect is a high-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
50
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Value Range
Default Value
22–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Frequency
22–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
80
HP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates Parameter
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Frequency
LP (Low-Pass) Filters
Options: LP Filter, LP Filter Sweep, LP Filter Sync, LP Shelving Filter
LP Filter
This effect is a static filter without modulation.
LP Filter Sweep
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
LP Filter Sync
This effect is a low-pass filter with its cutoff frequency
modulated by an LFO.
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
33
Rate
0–100
10
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Low Frequency 0–100
0
High Frequency 0–100
100
Resonance
0–100
50
Rate
8 bars – 1/32
1/4
Value Range
Default Value
22–19999 Hz
1500
Resonance
0–100
0
Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
LP Shelving Filter
This filter differs from the standard filter type, as it attenuates Parameter
all frequencies after the cutoff point equally.
Frequency
213
Parametric EQs
Options: PEQ 2-Band, 2-Shelf, PEQ 4-Band
PEQ 2-Band, 2-Shelf
This effect is a combination of one two-band parametric
equalizer and two shelving filters.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Low Frequency
22–1000 Hz
220
Frequency 1
82–3900 Hz
820
Frequency 2
220–10000 Hz
2200
High Frequency
560–19999 Hz
5600
Q1
0–100
0
Q2
0–100
0
Low Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 1
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 2
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
High Gain
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
PEQ 4-Band
This effect is a powerful four-band parametric equalizer with
four independent EQ ranges.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Low Frequency
22–1000 Hz
220
Frequency 1
82–3900 Hz
820
Frequency 2
220–10000 Hz
2200
High Frequency
560–19999 Hz
5600
Q1
0–100
5
Q2
0–100
5
Q3
0–100
5
Q4
0–100
5
Gain 1
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 2
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 3
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Gain 4
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
214
Distortions
Options: Distortion Amp, Distortion Fuzz, Distortion Grimey, Distortion Overdrive, Distortion Custom
Distortion Amp
This effect is designed to reproduce the sound of a tube
amplifier at high volumes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Tone
0–100
50
Dynamics
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Low
0–100
50
Low-Mid
0–100
50
High-Mid
0–100
50
High
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Grime
0–100
50
Center
0–100
50
Width
0–100
50
Resonance
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
Tone
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Distortion Fuzz
This popular effect uses hard clipping of the audio signal,
which, at extreme settings, can turn a standard waveform
into a square wave, producing a “razor” effect.
Distortion Grimey
This is a unique distortion effect that distorts a frequency
range in a selectable band.
Distortion Overdrive
This distortion is designed to sound like a mildly distorting
amplifier at medium volumes. It is the smoothest distortion
type available.
215
Distortion Custom
This effect is a highly customized distortion, capable of a
wide range of useable sounds.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Drive
0–100
50
+Soft
5–75
2
+Clip
5–50
25
–Soft
5–75
2
–Clip
5–50
25
Low
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Mid
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
High
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
0.0
Output
-18.0 – 18.0 dB
50
Compressors
A compressor is an effect that changes the dynamic range of a signal by automatically reducing its gain.
Options: Compressor Master, Compressor Opto, Compressor VCA, Compressor Vintage
Compressor Master
This is the most transparent compressor, able to perform
substantial volume adjustments without artifacts.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Oldskool
Off, On
Off
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
-6 – 18 dB
0
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Compressor Opto
The Opto Compressor is modeled after a vintage
Parameter
compressor type using an optical circuit to control the
volume reduction of the input signal. These compressors are Dry/Wet
usually associated with soft and unobtrusive attack and
Input
release characteristics.
Attack
216
Compressor VCA
This compressor is more modern-sounding, with a slightly
more transparent sound. A VCA Compressor tends to have
quicker attack and release times than an Opto Compressor.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Input
-6 – 18 dB
0
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Input
-6 – 18 dB
0
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Threshold
-50 – 0 dB
0
Ratio
1–20
1
Knee
1–100
1
Output
-6 – 24 dB
0
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Decimate
0–100
0
Bit Reducer
4–32
32
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Rate
0–100
0
Decimate
0–100
0
Compressor Vintage
This compressor has a sound similar to classic tube
compressors, with their gentle yet pumping response and a
dash of tube saturation.
Bit Reducers
Options: Decimator, Resampler
Decimator
Decimator down-samples the incoming signal by removing
bits from the digital signal. The difference between
decimation and resampling is that Decimator does not use
any filtering to mask or correct digital artifacts. The result is
an effect ranging from mild to almost completely pure digital
distortion, depending on the setting and the source material.
Resampler
Resampler is similar to Decimator in that it removes bits from
an incoming signal. The difference is that Resampler applies
a complex suite of filters and anti-aliasing to attempt to
retain the original sound quality. This is a method used by
popular vintage samplers and sampling drum machines from
the 1980s. Resampler can be used to achieve a “dirty”
sound on drum loops, without the harshness of distortion.
217
Other
Options: Auto Wah, Frequency Shifter, Transient Shaper
Auto Wah
This effect is a low-pass filter modulated by an envelope that Parameter
yields a classic funky “wah-wah”- like sound. The envelope
is triggered by the incoming signal’s amplitude. The amount Dry/Wet
of the envelope on the cutoff frequency is user-definable.
Resonance
Value Range
Default Value
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
0–100
75
Attack
0–100
30
Release
0–100
30
Center
0–100
50
Sensitivity
0–100
50
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Frequency
-1000 – 1000
0
Asynchrony
0–1000
0
A Pan
0–100
0
B Pan
0–100
100
A Gain
0–100
75
B Gain
0–100
75
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Dry/Wet
0–100 (dry–wet)
100
Attack
0–100
50
Release
0–100
50
Output
0–100
50
Frequency Shifter
A frequency shifter changes the frequencies of an input
signal by a fixed amount and alters the relationship of the
original harmonics. This can produce a chorus-like effect as
well as very crazy artificial timbres.
Transient Shaper
A transient shaper can be used to enhance or soften the
Attack and Release phases of audio material.
218
Glossary
This glossary briefly defines and explains many of the technical terms used throughout this manual.
Aftertouch
The majority of contemporary keyboards are capable of generating aftertouch messages. On this
type of keyboard, when you press harder on a key you are already holding down, a MIDI aftertouch
message is generated. This feature makes sounds even more expressive (e.g., through vibrato).
Aliasing
Aliasing is an audible side effect arising in digital systems as soon as a signal contains harmonics
higher than half the sampling frequency.
Amount
Describes to which extent a modulation source influences a given parameter.
Amplifier
An amplifier is a component that influences the volume level of a sound via a control signal. It
can be modulated by a control signal (e.g., generated by an envelope or an LFO).
Attack
An envelope parameter. This term describes the ascent rate of a time-relevant process (e.g., an
envelope from its starting point to the point where it reaches its highest value). The attack phase
is initiated immediately after a trigger signal is received (e.g., after you play a note on a trigger
pad or a keyboard).
Bit Rate
Bit rate (also known as word length), is the number of bits used to store the level information of
each single sample slice within a whole sample. The higher the bit rate, the more precise the
information about a sample (i.e., its dynamics’ resolution). Normal audio CDs are 16-bit. MPC
supports full 24-bit resolution.
Bounce
When you “bounce” a sequence, track, or program, you are rendering that part of your project as
an audio file (as opposed to a MIDI file). The MPC software lets you bounce sequences, tracks,
or programs as samples (saved to your project’s sample pool) or as full audio tracks (saved to
your project’s sample pool and added directly to the current sequence).
Bouncing a track will render that track after it is sent through its program. Bouncing a program
will render all tracks that use that program after they are sent through it. Bouncing a sequence
will render all tracks in that sequence after they are sent through their respective programs.
Clipping
Clipping is a sort of distortion that occurs when a signal exceeds the maximum value that can be
handled by a signal processing system it is fed into. The curve of a clipped signal is dependent
on the system where the clipping occurs. In the analog domain, clipping effectively limits the
signal to a given maximum level. In the digital domain, clipping is similar to a numerical overflow,
resulting in negative polarity of the signal’s portions exceeding the maximum level.
Control Change
MIDI messages enable you to manipulate the behavior of a sound generator to a significant
degree. This message essentially consists of two components:
(Controllers)
•
The controller number, which defines the parameter to be influenced. It can range from 0
to 127.
•
The controller value, which determines the extent of the modification.
Controllers can be used for effects such as slowly swelling vibrato, changing the stereo panning
position and influencing filter frequency.
Cutoff
The cutoff frequency is a significant factor for a filter. A low-pass filter for example dampens the
portion of the signal that lies above this frequency. Frequencies below this value are allowed to
pass through without being processed.
219
CV
CV stands for control voltage, an analog method of sending control messages to external
synthesizers, drum machines, etc. CV messages are typically used in conjunction with Gate
messages (CV messages determine the pitch of notes while Gate messages determine note
activation and length). CV messages are sent from the CV out ports of your MPC hardware (e.g.,
MPC X) and to the CV in ports of your external MIDI device.
Please note that each external MIDI device uses a specific control voltage range, which
determines how many volts are used in each octave (e.g., 1V/oct). Be mindful of this when
setting it up with the MPC software and/or controller hardware—mismatched voltage ranges can
produce unusual/undesirable “re-scaling” of the octaves.
Decay
Decay describes the descent rate of an envelope once the attack phase has reached its
maximum and the envelope drops to the level defined by the sustain value.
Envelope
An envelope is used to modulate a sound-shaping component within a given time. For instance,
an envelope that modulates the cutoff frequency of a filter opens and closes this filter over a
period of time. An envelope is started via a trigger, usually a MIDI note.
The classic ADSR envelope consists of four individually variable phases: attack, decay, sustain,
and release. Attack, decay and release are time or slope values, while sustain is an adjustable
level. Once an incoming trigger is received, the envelope runs through the attack and decay
phases until it reaches the programmed sustain level. This level remains constant until the trigger
is terminated. The envelope then initiates the release phase until it reaches the minimum value.
You can see and read about the envelopes used in the MPC software in Operation > Modes >
Program Edit Mode > Anatomy of an Envelope.
Filter
A filter is a component that allows some of a signal’s frequencies to pass through it and
dampens other frequencies. The most important aspect of a filter is the filter cutoff frequency.
Filters generally come in four categories: low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, and band-stop.
These are the available filters in the MPC software:
A low-pass filter (the most common type) dampens all frequencies above the cutoff
frequency.
A high-pass filter in turn dampens the frequencies below the cutoff.
A band-pass filter allows only those frequencies around the cutoff frequency to pass. All
others are dampened.
A band-stop filter does the opposite of a band-pass: it dampens only the frequencies
around the cutoff frequency.
A band-boost filter boosts the frequencies around the cutoff frequency, similar to what a
band on an equalizer would do. All other frequencies pass through normally.
The number of poles in a filter’s “slope” determines how extreme or subtle the effect of the
filter will be. Filters with one or two poles produce a more subtle sound while filters with six
or eight poles are much more pronounced.
In the MPC software, the Model filters are analog-style emulations of famous vintage synth
filters. Model1 is a four-pole filter that distorts at high input levels. Model2 uses a mellow
resonance with a “fattening” distortion in the lower frequencies. Model3 can produce
howling, piercing resonances and extreme sub frequencies—watch your speakers!
In the MPC software, the Vocal filters are formant filters that emulate the human voice. Vocal1
produces “ah” and “ooh” vowel sounds. Vocal2 uses three bands to produce “oh” and “ee”
vowel sounds. Vocal3 uses five bands to emulate an idealized model of the vocal tract.
In the MPC software, MPC3000 LPF is a dynamic, resonant low-pass filter (12 dB/oct) that
was used on the original MPC3000, released in 1994.
Please also see the entry for Resonance, an essential characteristic of a filter’s sound.
220
Gate
Gate messages are analog messages sent to external synthesizers, drum machines, etc. Gate
messages are typically used in conjunction with CV messages (CV messages determine the
pitch of notes while Gate messages determine note activation and length). Gate messages are
sent from the CV out ports of your MPC hardware (e.g., MPC X) and to the CV/Gate in ports of
your external MIDI device.
LFO
LFO is an acronym for low-frequency oscillator. The LFO generates a periodic oscillation at
a low frequency and features variable waveshapes. Similar to an envelope, an LFO can be
used to modulate a sound-shaping component.
MIDI
MIDI stands for musical instrument digital interface. Developed in the early 1980s, MIDI
enables interaction between various types of electronic music instruments from different
manufacturers. At the time a communications standard for heterogeneous devices did not
exist, so MIDI was a significant advance. It made it possible to link various devices with one
another through simple, standardized connectors.
Essentially, this is how MIDI works: One sender is connected to one or several receivers. For
instance, if you want to use a computer to play a MIDI synthesizer, the computer is the sender
and the synthesizer acts as the receiver. With a few exceptions, the majority of MIDI devices
are equipped with two or three ports for this purpose: MIDI In, MIDI Out and in some cases
MIDI Thru. The sender transfers data to the receiver via the MIDI Out jack. Data are sent via a
cable to the receiver’s MIDI In jack.
MIDI Thru has a special function. It allows the sender to transmit to several receivers. It routes
the incoming signal to the next device without modifying it. Another device is simply
connected to this jack, thus creating a chain through which the sender can address a number
of receivers. Of course it is desirable for the sender to be able to address each device
individually. To achieve this, a MIDI channel message is sent with each MIDI event.
MIDI Channel
This is a very important element of most messages. A receiver can only respond to incoming
messages if its receive channel is set to the same channel as the one the sender is using to
transmit data. Subsequently, the sender can address specific receivers individually. MIDI
Channels 1–16 are available for this purpose.
MIDI Clock
The MIDI clock message transmits real-time tempo information to synchronize processes
among several connected devices (e.g., a sound generator’s delay time to a MIDI sequencer).
Modulation
A modulation influences or changes a sound-shaping component via a modulation source.
Modulation sources include envelopes, LFOs or MIDI messages. The modulation destination
is a sound-shaping component such as a filter or a VCA.
Note On & Note Off This is the most important MIDI message. It determines the pitch and velocity of a generated
note. A note-on message will start a note. Its pitch is derived from the note number, which
can range from 0 to 127. The velocity ranges from 1 to 127. A velocity value of 0 is equivalent
to a note-off message.
Normalize
Normalization is a function to raise the level of a sample to its maximum (0 dB) without
causing distortion. This function automatically searches a sample for its maximum level and
consequently raises the entire sample’s level until the previously determined maximum level
reaches 0 dB. In general this results in a higher overall volume of the sample.
Panning
The process or the result of changing a signal’s position within the stereo panorama.
Pitch-Bend
Pitch-bend is a MIDI message. Although pitch-bend messages are similar in function to
control change messages, they are a distinct type of message. The resolution of a pitch-bend
message is substantially higher than that of a conventional controller message. The human
ear is exceptionally sensitive to deviations in pitch, so the higher resolution is used because it
relays pitch-bend information more accurately.
221
Program
A program is a file that contains a list of all samples to be used, and settings for each sample
(e.g., pad assignments, loop points, pitch tuning, effects, etc.) MPC’s Program Edit Mode is
where you can edit and assign samples (read more about this in Operation > Modes >
Program Edit Mode.). You can have a total of 128 programs in a project.
There are three kinds of programs that use samples for their sound source. Drum programs
are mostly used for creating drum programs and easy and quick assigning of samples to a
pad. With keygroup programs, you can use one sample (or more) and spread it across two or
more keys and play the sample chromatically over a keyboard. That way, there is no need to
sample every key of, for instance, a piano. Clip programs use several samples that can be
looped (clips), each of which can assigned to a pad; launching different combinations of clips
together lets you create intriguing, layered performances.
Program Change
These are MIDI messages that select sound programs. Programs 1 through 128 can be
changed via program change messages.
Release
An envelope parameter. This term describes the descent rate of an envelope to its minimum
value after a trigger is terminated. The release phase begins immediately after the trigger is
terminated, regardless of the envelope’s current status. For instance, the release phase may
be initiated during the attack phase.
Resonance
Resonance or emphasis is an important filter parameter. It emphasizes the frequencies around
the filter cutoff frequency by amplifing them with a narrow bandwidth. This is one of the most
popular methods of manipulating sounds. If you increase the emphasis to a level where the
filter enters a state of self-oscillation, it will generate a relatively pure sine waveform.
Root Key
The root key defines the original pitch of a recorded instrument or of a sample. Samples in
the MPC software contain the dedicated root key information. This information will be
created automatically during recording or importing.
Sample
When you tap the pads on your MPC hardware, you can trigger sounds that we call
samples. Samples are digitized snippets of audio that can be recorded using the recording
(sampling) function of your MPC hardware or loaded from the Browser.
You can edit and process a sample in different ways. For example, a sample can be
trimmed, looped, pitch-shifted or processed, using various effects. When you have finished
editing your sample, you can assign it to one or more drum pads to play it. Samples can be
either mono or stereo.
Sample Rate
This is the frequency representing the amount of individual digital sample scans per second
that are taken to capture an analog siginal digitally. For normal CD audio recordings, 44100
samples per second are used, also written as 44.1 kHz. The MPC software offers sampling
rates up to 96 kHz.
Sequence
A sequence is the most basic “building block” of music you can compose in the MPC
software. MIDI information from the MPC hardware pads, buttons, and Q-Link knobs are
recorded to the tracks of a sequence. Each sequence can contain 128 MIDI tracks and 128
audio tracks. Each project can store up to 128 separate sequences.
The length of a sequence can be set from 1 to 999 bars, which would be enough to create an
entire song using only one sequence. However, the MPC software has a dedicated Song
Mode that lets you chain sequences together to create a song.
Song
The MPC software’s Song Mode that allows you to arrange different sections (verse, chorus,
hook, etc.) in order to build a song. Each song can have up to 999 “steps” (stages in which a
sequence may play one or more times). Each project can store up to 32 songs.
222
Stretch Factor
The stretch factor is a value generated by the Warp algorithm in the software. When you
record an audio file, the current sequence tempo will be embedded with it. This information
is stored within the sample file when you save the project. When you warp an audio track
region, the warping algorithm uses this sequence tempo and the current value in the BPM
field to generate the stretch factor.
Sustain
This term describes the level of an envelope remaining constant after it has passed the attack
and decay phases. Once reached, the sustain level is kept until the trigger is terminated.
Time-Stretch
See Warp below.
Track
A sequence can contain 128 MIDI tracks and 128 audio tracks.
Each MIDI track contains MIDI note events and controller data. In this case, the track
contains no audio information—only MIDI information that uses the samples in a program (or
an external MIDI sound module) to generate its audio. You can edit your performance in
many different ways once the performance has been captured.
Each audio track contains an audio signal that has been recorded or imported into your
project. You can edit this audio within the software and incorporate it into your sequences
alongside your MIDI tracks.
Trigger
A trigger is a signal that initiates events. Trigger signals are very diverse. For instance, a MIDI
note or an audio signal can be used as a trigger. The events a trigger can initiate are also
very diverse. A common application for a trigger is its use to start an envelope.
Warp
The Warp feature in the MPC software lengthens or shortens a region of an audio track or
sample without changing its pitch. This enables you to fit the length of an audio track or sample
to the length of a sequence, a bar in your sequence, etc. while maintaining its original key.
Please note that the Warp algorithms are very CPU-intensive and can result in audio dropouts during playback if used too freely. Be mindful of how (and how often) you use the warp
function. You can reduce the CPU resources required by doing any/all of the following:
Minimize the amount of pitch adjustment of warped audio.
In the Wave Editor, avoid using extreme Stretch values, especially anything below 100.
Avoid warping very small audio regions.
Warp as few tracks or track regions as possible (i.e., reduce the number of total number
of voices of the polyphonic limit that use the Warp algorithm at a given time), especially
instances where the warped regions start at the same time.
Avoid rapidly triggering samples that are warped.
If you have warped samples used in a drum program, consider using the Flatten Pad
function to consolidate the affected pad’s layers into one audio sample (see here to learn
about this). After you flatten the pad, its sample/samples no longer need to be warped.
Use a Warp algorithm other than Elastique Pro, which is very CPU-intensive. See
Operation > General Features > Preferences > General to learn how to change this.
Using a higher buffer size (usually above 256) can reduce the possibility of CPU issues.
See Operation > General Features > Preferences > Audio to learn how to do this.
223
Trademarks & Licenses
Akai Professional and MPC are trademarks of inMusic Brands, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
AAX is a trademark of Avid Technology, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Ableton and the Ableton Logo are trademarks of Ableton AG.
ASIO and VST are trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH.
MPC software incorporates élastique Pro V3 by zplane.development.
Apple and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
SD and SDHC are registered trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
All other product names, company names, trademarks, or trade names are those of their respective owners.
224
Addenda
Updates in MPC 2.1
New Features
Exporting Expansions
You can export MPC Expansion Packs (installed on your computer) to your MPC X or MPC Live for use in its
Standalone Mode. (This has been added to Operation > General Features > Expansions > Exporting Expansions.)
To export MPC Expansions:
1. Connect your MPC X or MPC Live to your computer. Make sure both are powered on.
2. On your computer, open the MPC software.
3. On your MPC X or MPC Live, enter Controller Mode.
4. In the MPC software window, click the menu icon (≡), select File > Export, and then click Expansion….
5. In the Export Expansion to Standalone MPC window that appears, click the Drive menu and select a storage
device that you will use with your MPC X or MPC Live: the internal SATA drive (if you have installed one in your
MPC X or MPC Live), an SD card, or a USB flash drive.
6. In the Expansions list, click the box next to each one to select or deselect it. Only the selected ones will be
exported. Click Select all to select all of them or Select none to deselect all of them.
7. Click Export to start exporting, or click Cancel to close the window and not export anything.
The exporting process creates an Expansions folder at the root level of your storage device and copies your
MPC Expansions into it.
To use your expansions, restart your MPC X or MPC Live in Standalone Mode, enter the Browser, and tap
Expansion.
225
Snap: Absolute & Relative
While editing a MIDI or audio track, you can now use the Grid Editor to move or copy events using two different ways
of “snapping” note events to the grid: Absolute or Relative. (This has been added to Operation > General Features
> Editors.)
To switch between Absolute and Relative, click the magnet icon above the grid:
Absolute: Events will “snap” to the nearest time division on the grid (as determined by the TC field or
Time Correct window). This is the typical and traditional method of using the snap/quantization feature.
Relative: Events will “snap” to the nearest time division on the grid (as determined by the TC field or
Time Correct window) plus the original time position of the event (e.g., an event that is originally
three ticks past a time division on the grid will snap only to positions that are three ticks past every
time division).
Pitch Quantization
In a MIDI track, you can now force the pitches of note events into a specific scale. (This has been added to
Operation > General Features > Toolbar > Menu > Edit.)
To open the Pitch Quantize window, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click Pitch Quantize.
Click the Setup menu and select the desired root note of the scale.
Click the Scale menu and select a type of scale.
Click Only apply to selected events to select or deselect it. When selected, only the currently selected note
events will be quantized. When deselected, all pitches in the current track will be quantized.
Click the Start note and End note menus and select the lowest-possible and highest-possible pitches
(respectively) where the quantized note events will be placed. If a note event is originally outside of this
range, it will be forced to the nearest pitch (within the scale) inside the range.
Click Do It to continue or Close to return to the previous screen.
226
Step Sequencer: Velocity Adjustment via Q-Links
While using the Step Sequencer, you can now use the Q-Link knobs to adjust the velocity of the note event at each
step (while Q-Link Mode is set to Screen). The number of each step will be shown under the corresponding Q-Link
knob. (This has been added to Operation > Modes > Step Sequencer > Q-Links.)
To adjust the velocity of each note event, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to select a value (1–127).
To enter a note event at a step, use the corresponding Q-Link knob to change its velocity from 0 (Off) to a
value of 1 or greater.
To delete a note event from a step, set the corresponding Q-Link knob to its minimum position, 0 (Off).
Faster Attack for Amp Envelopes
In the amp envelope of a drum program or keygroup program, an attack value of 0 now produces a much faster
response, thus making your drum hits even punchier than before. (You can set the attack value in Program Edit
Mode. See Operation > Modes > Program Edit Mode > Drum Programs and Keygroup Programs to learn more.)
Important: Any drum or keygroup programs that you created and saved before this update will load in MPC 2.1 with
an attack value of 1 to ensure backwards compatibility.
Multiple Plugin Windows
You can now view multiple plugin windows at the same time.
Support for Akai Professional MPD2 & MPK2 Series
The software now supports pad control, pad colors, and bank-switching while using an MPK225, MPK249, or
MPK261. It also now supports pad control while using an MPD218, MPD226, or MPD232.
227
Updates in MPC 2.2
New Features
MIDI Learn
You can now use the MIDI Learn function to assign areas of the MPC software to external MIDI controllers.
To display the MIDI Learn browser, do either of the following:
• Click the menu icon (≡), select View > Browser, and then click MIDI Learn Browser.
• In the lower-right corner, click the MIDI controller icon.
To select a MIDI Learn mode, click Global or Project at the top of the browser to show its assignments below.
Global MIDI mappings are helpful if you use certain MIDI controllers across multiple projects. Project MIDI
mappings are saved within a project, which can be helpful if your MIDI controller usage is particular to each
one. See Global or Project below.
Each assignment has the following settings:
Target: This is the assigned command or parameter. The list of targets in the Global tab is comprehensive, while
the list of targets in the Project tab must be added and selected.
Type: This is the type of message: Toggle Button, Momentary Button, Fixed Button, Note, Abs CC, Rel CC
Offset, Rel CC 2’s Complement. This is automatically detected based on the parameter itself, but you can use
this field to assign it manually if it does not detect it properly.
Ch: This is the MIDI channel the control is using.
Data: This is the MIDI note number or CC number.
Flip: Click this box to select or deselect it. When selected, the control’s polarity will be reversed (e.g., a button’s
“off” state will become its “on” state and vice versa).
228
Global
Use the Global MIDI Learn feature to assign your MIDI controller to pads,
Q-Link knobs, transport controls, or other assignable parameters in the
MPC software.
To assign a global parameter to a hardware control:
1. Click Learn at the top of the MIDI Learn browser so it turns yellow. (The
Enable button will also activate and turn light gray if it is not already
activated.)
2. Click a parameter that has a yellow overlay to select it. Alternatively,
click it in the list in the MIDI Learn Browser.
3. Move or press the desired control on your MIDI controller.
To assign more controls, repeat Steps 2–3.
To stop assigning controls, click Learn again so it turns gray.
To clear an assignment, right-click or press and hold Ctrl (Windows) or
Control (macOS) and click the assignment in the MIDI Learn browser.
Click Clear MIDI Mapping to clear the assignment, or press Esc or click
anywhere else to cancel.
To select an assignment, click Learn so it turns yellow, and then press and hold Shift while moving the control on
your MIDI controller.
Each collection of these assignments is called a MIDI map, which you can export as a file (.xmm) to import into other
MPC projects. You can also disable, re-enable, or switch between different MIDI maps while working with your project.
To select a MIDI map, click the menu next to Enable. Select Factory to view the available preset MIDI maps, or
select User to view MIDI maps you have created.
To enable or disable a MIDI map, click Enable at the top of the MIDI Learn browser. The button is light gray
when activated and dark gray when deactivated.
To show only mappings for specific controls or commands, click the View menu above the list of assignments,
and then click a type of control or command.
To show only mappings for the selected control type, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu,
and then click List Follows Control so it is selected.
To create a new MIDI map, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click New MIDI Map.
229
To create a duplicate of the current MIDI map, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then
click Duplicate. An identical MIDI map will be created and appended with Copy.
To clear all assignments from the current MIDI map, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu,
and then click Clear. In the window that appears, click OK to continue and clear the assignments, or click
Cancel to close the window and keep them. (You can do this with MIDI maps from the list of User maps only,
not the Factory list.)
To delete the current MIDI map, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click Delete.
In the window that appears, click OK to continue and delete the MIDI map, or click Cancel to close the window
and keep it. (You can do this with MIDI maps from the list of User maps only, not the Factory list.)
To export the current MIDI map, click three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click Export. In the
Export MIDI Mapping window that appears, do any of the following:
To select the storage device you want to view, click the down arrow () next to the file path. If you have
storage devices connected to your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as well.
To enter a folder, double-click it or press Enter.
To create a new folder, click New Folder, type a name for the new folder, and then click OK or press Enter
to confirm the name, or click Cancel or press Esc to keep the original name. You will immediately enter the
new folder.
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow ().
To name the file, click the File field at the bottom of the window, and type a name.
To save the file, click Save or press Enter.
To cancel, click Cancel or press Esc.
To import a different MIDI map, do any of the following:
•
Click and drag a MIDI map file (.xmm) onto the software window and release it. That map will be
selected immediately.
•
Place a MIDI map file (.xmm) in the MIDI Learn folder on your computer, and then click the three-lines
icon next to the controller menu, and then click Refresh.
Windows: [your hard drive]\Program Data\Akai\MPC\Midi Learn
macOS: [your hard drive]\Users\[your user name]\Library\Application Support\Akai\MPC\Midi Learn
•
Click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click Import. In the Import MIDI
Mapping window that appears, do any of the following:
To select the storage device you want to view, click the down arrow () next to the file path. If
you have storage devices connected to your MPC hardware, they will appear in this column, as well.
To enter a folder, double-click it or press Enter.
To move up one folder level, click the up arrow ().
To import the file, click Open or press Enter.
To cancel, click Cancel or press Esc.
To refresh the list of MIDI maps, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click Refresh.
Do this if you have manually placed a MIDI map file (.xmm) in the Midi Learn folder (in the MPC application
folder) and need it to appear in the list.
230
Project
Use the Project MIDI Learn feature to assign your MIDI controller to various
parameters in your specific MPC project:
•
Mixer parameters such as volume, pan, mute, and solo for MIDI or
audio tracks, programs, returns, submixes, and master outputs
•
Pad parameters (for drum programs and clip programs only) such
as tuning, filter and amp envelopes, layer settings, LFO settings,
and velocity
•
Program parameters, which depend on the program type
•
Insert effects parameters, which depend on the effect type
•
Plugin instrument parameters, which depend on the plugin
These assignments will be saved with your MPC project.
Tip: Because these MIDI assignments are saved within a project, you can
use them while working with a project on both the desktop version of the
MPC software or on your MPC hardware in Standalone Mode.
To assign a project parameter to a hardware control:
1. Click Learn at the top of the MIDI Learn browser so it turns yellow. (The
Enable button will also activate and turn light gray if it is not already
activated.)
2. Click the + icon in the upper-right corner of the browser to create an
“empty” assignment (its Target menus will be set to None and Off).
Alternatively, click an assignment that is already in the list if you want to
change it.
3. Click a project-specific parameter (e.g., a mixer setting or program
parameter) to select it. The two Target menus will indicate the
parameter you selected.
Alternatively, click the first Target menu to select a MIDI or audio track,
program, return, submix, or master output (for drum programs and clip
programs, you can select the entire program or a single pad within it).
After that, click the second Target menu to select the parameter.
4. Move or press the desired control on your MIDI controller. You can
press and hold Alt (Windows) or Option (macOS) while moving or
pressing multiple controls to assign them simultaneously.
To assign more controls, repeat Steps 2–4.
To stop assigning controls, click Learn again so it turns gray.
To clear an assignment, right-click or press and hold Ctrl (Windows) or  (macOS) and click the assignment in the
MIDI Learn browser. Click Clear MIDI Mapping to clear the assignment, or press Esc or click anywhere else to
cancel.
To delete an assignment (the entire slot), right-click or press and hold Ctrl (Windows) or  (macOS) and click the
assignment in the MIDI Learn browser. Click Delete Assignment to delete the assignment, or press Esc or click
anywhere else to cancel.
To clear all assignments, click the three-lines icon next to the controller menu, and then click Clear All
Assignments. In the window that appears, click OK to continue and delete the assignments, or click Cancel to close
the window and keep them.
231
Humanize
You can now apply randomization to the timing, length, and/or velocity of MIDI events.
To open the Humanize window, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click Humanize.
Click each checkbox to select or deselect its option.
Click and drag each slider left or right to set its value. Alternatively, click anywhere along its length, or click it,
type a value, and press Enter.
Humanize Time determines whether or not humanization will be applied to the timing of MIDI events.
Amount (Pulses) determines the maximum number of pulses by which the timing of an event will be
adjusted.
Eagerness determines how dramatically the humanization effect is applied to the timing. Negative values
correspond to playing “ahead of the beat” while positive values correspond to playing “behind the beat.”
Humanize Note Length determines whether or not humanization will be applied to the duration of MIDI
note events.
Length (%) determines how dramatically the humanization effect is applied to note lengths.
Humanize Velocity determines whether or not humanization will be applied to the velocities of MIDI note
events.
Strength (%) determines how dramatically the humanization effect is applied to note velocities.
Only apply to selected events determines whether or not these humanization values will be applied to
all notes in the track (deselected) or just the currently selected notes (selected).
Click Apply to apply the humanization values while keeping this window open.
Click Do It to apply the humanization values and close the window.
Click Close to close the window without making any changes.
232
Generate Random Events
You now create random melodic or drum patterns on the current MIDI track.
To open the Generate Random Events window, click the menu icon (≡), select Tools, and click Generate
Random Events.
Click the Event Type menu to select the type of events you want to create: Drum events or Melodic events.
Click the Replace menu to select how the events will be created relative to the existing events on the track:
•
Replace all events: Select this option to replace all events on the track with the randomly generated
ones.
•
Replace events in note range: Select this option to replace all events in the designated note range
on the track with the randomly generated ones. Use the Bank or Start pad and End pad menus to
set the note range for drum events or the Start note and End note menus to set the note range for
melodic events.
•
Add to existing events: Select this option to add the randomly generated events to the track without
replacing or overwriting the existing ones.
Click and drag the Pattern size (bars) field up or down to set how many bars the events will use. Alternatively,
click it, type a value, and press Enter. The highest possible value is the number of bars in the current sequence.
Click the Note length menu to select the duration of the events. (This feature is nonfunctional if Legato is
enabled while generating melodic events.)
Click Apply to generate the events while keeping this window open.
Click Do It to generate the events and close the window.
Click Close to close the window without generating any events.
If Event Type is set to Drum events:
Click the Bank menu to select the pad bank that will be used to generate the events or select Range to use
the Start pad and End pad menus to define a specific pad range instead.
Click the Start pad or End pad menus to define a specific pad range over which the events will be
generated. You can use these menus only if the Bank menu is set to Range.
Click and drag the Density (%) slider left or right to set how closely together the events will be placed in the
track. Alternatively, click anywhere along its length, or click it, type a value, and press Enter.
Click and drag the Rhythm variation slider left or right to set how widely or narrowly the rhythmic patterns of the
generated notes vary. Alternatively, click anywhere along its length, or click it, type a value, and press Enter.
233
If Event Type is set to Melodic events:
Click the Start note or End note menus to define a specific note range over which the events will be generated.
Click Legato to select or deselect it. When selected, the generated notes will be extended or shortened to
create a long, unbroken phrase from the first note event’s start point to the last note event’s end point. Each
note event will sustain until another note event starts. If multiple note events start at the same time (and are
not the last note events), their lengths will become identical. When deselected, the generated notes will use
the duration set by the Note length menu.
Without legato applied.
With legato applied.
Click and drag the Polyphony field up or down to set the maximum number of note events that can be
sounding simultaneously in the track: 1–8. Alternatively, click it, type a value, and press Enter.
Click Constrain notes to scale to select or deselect it. When selected, the notes will be within the scale
determined by the Scale menu. When deselected, the notes will be chromatic.
Click and drag the Density (%) slider left or right to set how closely together the events will be placed in the
track. Alternatively, click anywhere along its length, or click it, type a value, and press Enter.
Click the Root note menu to set the root note of the scale that the generated notes will use.
Click the Scale menu to select the scale or mode that the notes will use (based on the Root note selection).
Multiple Plugin Windows Enable/Disable
You can now choose to allow multiple plugin windows to be displayed at the same time (a feature added to MPC 2.1)
or to restrict it to single plugin windows (how plugin windows worked prior to MPC 2.1). (This has been added to
Operation > General Features > Preferences > General.)
To enable or disable multiple plugin windows, click the menu icon (≡), select Edit, and click Preferences. In
the Preferences window, click the General tab, and then click Allow Multiple Plugin Windows to select or
deselect the option.
234
Corrections
Tutorial > Renaming & Saving (Page 15)
Operation > General Features > Toolbar > Menu > File (Page 42)
Operation > General Features > Preferences (Page 95)
We corrected the explanations of how project templates work.
Operation > General Features > Preferences (Page 92)
We added the following exceptions to how the Preferences are saved.
Changes to the Preferences are saved automatically except for Vintage Mode (in the General tab) and Start
Time (in the Sync tab).
Operation > General Features > Preferences (Page 92–96)
We revised the lists of options to match the formatting and order shown in the Preferences window.
Operation > Modes > Program Edit Mode > Program Editor > Keygroup Programs (Page 132)
We added the following description of the Trans parameter for keygroup programs:
Trans shifts the pitch of the MIDI notes sent to the program up to 36 semitones up or down.
Operation > Modes > Song Mode (Page 197)
We added the following note to the Song Mode chapter:
Important: When creating a song, the program used by each track in the song’s first sequence will be used by
all subsequent tracks. In other words, all identically numbered tracks (across sequences) will use the program
used by the first sequence in the song—regardless of what programs each track uses while not in Song Mode.
For example, if you create a project in this way…:
• Track 1 of Sequence 1 uses a drum program.
• Track 1 of Sequence 2 uses a keygroup program.
• A song uses Sequence 1 as its first sequence and then uses Sequence 2 any time after it.
…then, in that song, Track 1 in Sequence 2 will use the same drum program as Track 1, Sequence 1.
Because of this, we recommend trying to be consistent while creating tracks in sequences that you intend to use
in a single song. Remember that you can copy one track to another if you ever need to reorder the tracks of a
sequence (see General Features > Editing Processes to learn about this).
235
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising